You are on page 1of 389

User Manual

Air Interface Measurement Tool

Version 7.40

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

2014 by Anite Finland Ltd. All rights reserved.


This manual, as well as the software described in it, is furnished under license and may only be used
or copied in accordance with the terms of such license. The information in this manual is intended for
informational use only and is subject to change without notice. Anite Finland Ltd assumes no
responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this user manual.
Except as permitted by such license, no part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written
permission of Anite Finland Ltd.
Windows 7, Windows 8, Outlook, and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of the
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. MapInfo and MapX are registered
trademarks of MapInfo Corporation. CDMA 2000 is a registered trademark of the
Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA -USA). The license management portion of this
Licensed Technology is based on SentinelLM* 1989-2003 Rainbow Technologies, Inc. Sentinel is a
registered* trademark of SafeNet, Inc. All rights reserved.
POLQA is a registered trademark of OPTICOM GmbH. Used by permission.
2011 by the POLQA Coalition of OPTICOM GmbH, Germany - SwissQual AG, Switzerland - KPN,
The Netherlands - TNO, The Netherlands.

Revision 7.40.00, Last edited October 2014

QU IC K GU ID E

CONTENTS

QUICK GUIDE

SETTING UP THE SYSTEM

DATA MEASUREMENTS

11

USING NEMO OUTDOOR


Using Nemo Outdoor with Command Line Options

12
13

BEFORE YOU BEGIN

14

LICENSING
Technical Support Expiration

14
17

IMPORTANT
Local Laws and Regulations
Nemo Outdoor Laptop Settings
Traffic Safety
Operating Environment

18
18
18
21
21

NEMO OUTDOOR SYSTEM OVERVIEW 22


VOICE TESTING

22

CIRCUIT-SWITCHED DATA TESTING

22

PACKET-SWITCHED DATA TESTING

23

NEMO MEDIA ROUTER


Installing Nemo Media Router
Updating the Nemo Media Router License

23
24
29

NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI

30

NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI LITE

31

NEMO INVEX

32

INDOOR MEASUREMENTS

33

INSTALLING NEMO OUTDOOR SYSTEM34


HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS

34

OTHER HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS

35

NEMO OUTDOOR SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

35

NEMO OUTDOOR DEVICE SET-UP


Connecting a GPS Receiver
Connecting a Scanner
Connecting Voice Quality Devices

36
36
36
36

NEMO INVEX DEVICE SET-UP


Two Data Connections on One Measurement Server

37
43

GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR DRIVE TESTING

44

CONFIGURATION SETTINGS
CONFIGURING NEMO OUTDOOR
Configuration through Welcome page

45
45
45

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Configuration through Load Device Configuration Dialog 48


Configuring Nemo Outdoor Manually
50
Use Case 1. Start Measurements Automatically upon Device Startup
CONFIGURING TEST MOBILES

53

CONFIGURATION MANAGER
Handler Information
User Interface
Notifications
Scripts
Base Station Files
Device Configurations
Devices
View Groups

53
54
55
66
70
71
72
73
79

52

MEASUREMENT PROPERTIES
80
Measurement Properties General
80
Measurement Properties Measurement
81
Measurement Properties Frequency Scanning with Mobiles
85
Measurement Properties Pilot Scanning with Mobiles 88
Measurement Properties Frequency, Pilot, and Spectrum Scanning with Scanners
Measurement Properties - Script
89

DURING MEASUREMENTS
TEXTUAL NOTES

91
91

NEMO COMMANDER REMOTE CONTROL OPTION FOR NEMO OUTDOOR/ INVEX


Nemo Commander Server Options
93
Initial Field Unit Configuration
93
Measurement Workflow
94
Events Reported by Nemo Outdoor/Nemo Invex to Nemo Commander 94
MAKING SCANNING MEASUREMENTS
With a Scanner
With a Mobile

89

96
96
96

MAKING VOICE CALLS


Voice Call Properties
Voice Call Properties TETRA
Push-to-Talk (PTT) Testing

96
97
101
102

VOICE QUALITY MEASUREMENTS

105

MAKING VIDEO CALLS

105

DATA TRANSFERS
Configuring the Data Connection
Configuring the FTP Protocol
Configuring the SFTP Protocol
Configuring the HTTP(S) Protocol
Configuring the (HTTP) Browsing Protocol
Configuring the POP3 Protocol
Configuring the SMTP Protocol
Configuring the IMAP Protocol
Configuring the WAP Protocol

108
108
113
116
118
121
123
124
127
129

92

QU IC K GU ID E

Configuring the Streaming Protocol


Configuring the Trace Route Protocol
Making Data Transfers

131
132
134

STREAMING VIDEO QUALITY TESTING


PEVQ-S Properties

134
136

VOIP CALLS

137

FACEBOOK TESTING

139

SMS TESTING
SMS Testing with CDMA Terminals

142
143

MMS TESTING
Packet Session Settings for MMS
MMS Editor
Making MMS Measurements
MMS Settings for Nokia 6630, 6680, and N80
MMS Settings for Nokia N95, 6120, and 6121

144
145
146
146
147
150

USSD TESTING

154

START EXTERNAL APPLICATION

155

ICMP PING

157

MEASUREMENT PROFILES

158

IP PACKET CAPTURING

159

MAKING SCRIPT FILES


Script Transfer Stop Commands
Add Menu
Running Scripts

161
162
165
176

MEASUREMENT LISTS

177

FORCING FUNCTIONS
Channel Locking
Band Locking
Network Selection
Handover Control
Cell Barring
Set Terminal Radio On/Off (Airplane Mode)
AMR Codec Forcing

180
180
182
183
184
189
189
189

CELL TESTING

190

MISSING NEIGHBOR DETECTION


191
Missing Neighbor Detection with a Mobile
192
Missing Neighbor Detection with a Scanner/Scanner and Mobile 193
PILOT POLLUTION ANALYSIS
194
UMTS Pilot Pollution Analysis on Mobile Phone
196
UMTS Pilot Pollution Analysis Based on Scanner Measurements 197
CDMA/EVDO Pilot Pollution Analysis - Mobile Phones 197
CDMA/EVDO Pilot Pollution Analysis - Scanners
198
GSM INTERFERENCE ANALYSIS

198

BAND SCAN

201

TIMESLOT TESTING

203

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

VIEWING GRAPHS
205
Graph Popup Menu
206
Zoom - Scatter Graph
210
Graph Side Panel - Layers
211
Graph Side Panel Values & Parameter
218
Graph Layer Color Configuration
221
Spectrum Graphs
225
Color Grid Graphs
227
How to Read MIMO Parameters in Bar Graph Data View227
VIEWING GRIDS
229
Find Function in Signaling Grid Based on Decoded Message
Grid Popup Menu
230
VIEWING MAPS
Base Stations on a Map
MapX Maps
Route Plans
Map Popup Menu
Color Set Editor
Map Example 1
Map Example 2
Map Example 3
Map Example 4
Map Example 5
Map Example 6

255
256
259
260
264
287
290
291
292
293
294
296

VIEWING INDOOR MAPS


Floorplans and BTS Files
Multiple Routes and Floorplans
Indoor Route Planning
iBwave Maps
Indoor Map Popup Menu

299
301
303
304
305
310

EXPORT/IMPORT SETTINGS
Export Settings to File
Export Settings to FTP Server
Import Settings from File
Import Settings from FTP Server

319
319
320
321
322

ENDING MEASUREMENTS
MEASUREMENT REPORT

MEASUREMENT RESULTS

323
324

326

ANALYZING MEASUREMENT RESULTS

326

PLAYING BACK MEASUREMENT FILES


Selecting Playback Files
During Playback
Viewing and Moving Markers
Closing Playback Files

326
326
327
328
329

UPLOADING MEASUREMENT FILES TO SERVER

330

EXPORTING MEASUREMENTS

331

230

QU IC K GU ID E

USER INTERFACE

335

VIEW GROUPS

335

MENU BAR

336

TOOLBAR

336

STATUS BAR

336

NEMO OUTDOOR MENUS


File Menu
Edit Menu
View Menu
Measurement Menu
Remote Menu
Playback Menu
Data Menu
Window Menu
Help Menu

337
337
338
339
340
342
342
342
343
343

CUSTOMIZING MENUS AND TOOLBARS

344

NEMO OUTDOOR WINDOWS


Custom Windows
Parameter Tree Search Functionality
Devices View
Device Status View
Server Status View
Output Window
Script Status Window
Controlling Windows

348
348
349
350
352
354
355
355
355

TROUBLESHOOTING

357

LOW THROUGHPUT
All Windows Versions

357
358

DEVICE STATUS VIEW

361

CANNOT ADD DEVICES

361

CANNOT MAKE CALLS/PACKET TRANSFERS

362

MEASUREMENT FILE CHECKSUM NOTIFICATION

362

NEMO OUTDOOR BUTTONS

363

TOOLBAR BUTTONS

363

DIALOG BUTTONS

364

GRAPH TOOLBAR BUTTONS

365

MAP TOOLBAR BUTTONS

366

SHORTCUT KEYS

368

NOTIFICATION SYMBOLS

369

TECHNICAL SUPPORT

372

USER CLUB

372

NEMO SUPPORT PORTAL

372

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

PHONE AND EMAIL SUPPORT

APPENDIX 1

372

374

MAKING MAPINFO RASTER MAPS


Registering a Raster Map with MapInfo SW

APPENDIX 2

374
374

376

CDMA SETTINGS AND PRL EDITING IN NEMO OUTDOOR376

APPENDIX 3 - TROUBLESHOOTING DATA TRANSFER ISSUES


380
PS CONNECTION WORKS BUT NO DATA
UAC Settings
Antivirus Filtering
Low Data Throughputs

APPENDIX 4
END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT

380
380
380
380

385
385

QU IC K GU ID E

QUICK GUIDE
This quick guide will explain briefly how to set up the Nemo Outdoor measurement system and how to
start the actual measurements. Check the cross-references for more detailed explanations on using
Nemo Outdoor.

SETTING UP THE SYSTEM

Nemo Outdoor software license is tied to a HASP USB key and it is not possible to install Nemo
Outdoor without it. Software-based licenses are not available.

Installing and running Nemo Outdoor requires administrator rights.

Do not upgrade, root, or reflash your measurement terminal firmware. Doing so will cause the
terminal to permanently lose its measurement capability!
1. Installing the software. Check the manual for hardware requirements if necessary (see
Hardware and Software Requirements). Run the Nemo Outdoor installation program Nemo
Outdoor 6.xx.xx.exe from the Nemo Outdoor CD-ROM. The Nemo Outdoor SW and handlers are
installed in the same setup.
2. During the installation, Nemo Outdoor will ask you to insert the HASP USB key on the computer
on which you are running Nemo Outdoor (see Licensing). Please insert the USB key and wait until
Windows has completed installing the device drivers. Press OK to continue the setup.
3. When the installation is finished, restart the computer.
4. The measurement mobiles, GPS receiver, and scanner are connected to the computers USB
ports.
5. If you are making a data measurement, you need to create a dial-up connection. Follow the
instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide provided in the Nemo Outdoor package to set
up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile.

Choose one of the following steps:


Select step 5 if you are a first-time user of Nemo Outdoor.
Go to step 6 if you are an older user of Nemo Outdoor and would like to use the Load Device
Configuration dialog.
Go to step 7 if you would like to set up the system manually.
6. On the Welcome page, the Load a Measurement tool enables you to open a previously viewed
measurement with the attached devices for playback. In the Open a Device Configuration tool
you can select saved device configurations, and start the devices in online mode, or decide to
work offline first and connect and start them later by clicking the work offline
button in Nemo
Outdoor. In addition, the Automatic device detection functionality in the Create New Device
Configuration tool automatically detects devices connected to the computer and assigns the
appropriate, previously created COM port and dial-up information to them.
7. To view the Load Device Configuration dialog, click the Other.. button in the Open a Device
Configuration field in the Welcome to Nemo Outdoor dialog (see Configuration through Load
Device Configuration Dialog).

10

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

8. If you have used Nemo Outdoor before and would like to start in online mode, select a premade
device configuration and click Start Devices. All the devices included in the device configuration
file will be activated and you are ready to start measurements. If you prefer setting up the
measurement configuration offline, that is, without connecting and starting the measurement
devices, select a pre-made device configuration and click the Work Offline button. You can
change the measurement configurations in the offline mode and activate the device later. When
you want to activate the devices, connect the devices to the measurement system and click the
work offline button
in the Nemo Outdoor toolbar.
9. If you want to configure Nemo Outdoor manually, close the Welcome page or Load Device
Configuration dialog when you start Nemo Outdoor. You can go to File | Open Measurement,
and select a saved measurement for playback, or you can open a saved device configuration in
File | Open Device Configuration and start a measurement in online of offline mode.
Alternatively, you can go to Measurement | Add New Device, select a device and configure it for
measurements. You can also do this from the configuration manager (Ctrl+M) (see step 9). In
addition, you can also use the Autodetect devices functionality by going to Measurement |
Autodetect Devices, which automatically detects a previously added device and its assigned
COM ports and dial-up connection.
10. Open the Configuration Manager dialog (Ctrl+M) to add measurement devices manually. Select
the Device item and click the Add button . Select the device type (phone, scanner, GPS) that
you want to add and select the device model from the list. Click Next. In the Device Configuration
dialog, select the correct COM ports and click OK.
11. If you are using a GPS receiver, you will also need a map. Use the Windows Explorer to copy all
the required map files to the maps folder, for example, C:\Nemo Tools\maps. Define the default
map file and map folder as follows: open the Configuration Manager dialog, double-click the User
Interface item and select the Paths tab. In the Map field, browse the folder where map files are
stored. In the Default map field, browse the default map file (see User Interface Properties
Paths).
12. If you have base station files (.nbf or .csv), copy them to the BTS files folder, for example,
C:\Nemo Tools\BTS files. When you want to view a BTS file on a map, open the Measurement
Properties dialog for the measurement mobile used, and browse a file in the BTS File field. Click
OK. Open a map through the Data menu and the BTS icons should appear on the map.

QU IC K GU ID E

11

DATA MEASUREMENTS

A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the dial-up
server (number, username, and password) are operator-specific.

Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection
and to configure the measurement mobile.

Setting up data measurements:


1. Configure the measurement device in the Device Configuration dialog (see Device Configuration
for Mobiles and Modems). Define the Trace and Modem Ports and select a Dial-Up Connection.
2. Open the Measurement Properties, Measurement dialog (see Measurement Properties
Measurement). Please note that the selection is device-specific.

3. For circuit-switched data measurements, double-click the Circuit-Switched Data Call item to
define Data Call Properties. For packet-switched data calls, double-click the Packet Session item
to define Packet Session Settings.
4. Select and configure a data protocol in by double-clicking the item under Supported Data
Protocols.

12

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

5. To set up ICMP Ping measurements (can be performed simultaneously with the data
measurements), double-click the ICMP Ping field and define the Ping Settings (see ICMP Ping).
6. To set up SMS measurements (can be performed simultaneously with the data measurements),
double-click the Short Messaging Service field and define the SMS Testing Settings (see SMS
Testing).
7. To set up MMS measurements (can be performed simultaneously with the data measurements),
double-click the Multimedia Messaging Service field and define the MMS Settings (see MMS
Testing).
8. To set up USSD measurements (can be performed simultaneously with data measurements),
double-click the USSD Message field and define the USSD Message Settings (see USSD
Testing).
9. Click OK. You can now start data measurements.

USING NEMO OUTDOOR


When a green light is blinking in the Device Status window, the device is connected properly and is
ready for measurements.
1. First, open some measurement windows through the Data menu for monitoring the measurement.
Alternatively you can open a workspace (File | Open Workspace) that contains some predefined
views (graphs, grids, maps, etc.).
2. You can use Scripts (see Scripts) to generate a sequence of actions that Nemo Outdoor will
execute automatically. Click the Device script settings button in the Devices view. Select an
existing script in the Script File field or create a new one by clicking the Script Editor button.
3. If you want to be notified about certain events during the measurement, use the Notifications
function (see Notifications). Click the Device notification settings button
in the Devices view
to access the Notifications dialog.
4. Run a script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button
. Nemo Outdoor will start the recording
automatically. To stop running the script, click the button again. To finish both the recording and
the script, click the Stop button .
5. To perform measurements manually, select the appropriate actions, such as, start voice call or
send MMS message, from the Measurement control
menu.
6. Stop the recording by clicking the Stop button . Nemo Outdoor has recorded a measurement
file of the performed test calls/scan on the computers hard disk. You can playback the
measurement file by clicking the Playback button in the Report dialog. Click the Rename button
to change the file name.
7. Click the Start Playback button
to playback a file. During playback use the Pause button
to
freeze the playback and observe the different measurement windows for that particular point in
time.

QU IC K GU ID E

13

Using Nemo Outdoor with Command Line Options


Outdoor supports the following command line options. These command lines will enable the user to
enter a certain profile in Nemo Outdoor. You can enter the command lines either with Command
Prompt through Start | Run | cmd, or you can create a shortcut to Nemo Outdoor on the desktop and
enter the command line to the shortcuts Properties | Shortcut |Target field.

/W <workspace> will directly open the specified workspace in Nemo Outdoor

/H <hw config> will directly open the given hardware configuration in Nemo Outdoor

/M SIMPLE will open Nemo Outdoor in limited mode, in which the user is not able to save any
changes made to the hardware configuration or workspace

/DEBUGBIN will start debug logging

For example, the command line below will start Nemo Outdoor, load the test.worx workspace,
N95.hwcx hardware configuration, and prevent any changes possibly made to them from taking effect.

Outdoor /W test.worx /H N95.hwcx /M SIMPLE

14

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

BEFORE YOU BEGIN


This manual explains how to set up and operate the Nemo Outdoor Air Interface Measurement Tool
Software developed by Anite Finland Ltd.
Nemo Outdoor is a portable engineering tool for measuring and monitoring the air interface of digital
networks. The supported network standards are:
cdmaOne 450, 800,1900 MHz
CDMA2000
1xEVDO
AMPS
DVB-H
EGPRS
GSM 850, 900, 1800, 1900 MHz
GPRS
HSDPA
HSUPA
HSPA+
LTE
TD-SCDMA
TETRA
iDEN
UMTS (FDD mode)
WiMAX
Nemo Outdoor is an effective tool for tracing digital networks. Nemo Outdoor collects measurement
results and geographical coordinates (when used with a GPS receiver) and stores them on a hard
disk. Measurement results provide useful information for network optimization, verification, and
maintenance purposes. Results can be efficiently and easily viewed with the Nemo analysis tool Nemo
Analyze.
Nemo Outdoor uses licensed technology from various manufacturers. For a complete list of supported
devices, see the Nemo Outdoor product description and data sheet.

LICENSING
Nemo Outdoor software license is tied to a HASP USB key and it is not possible to install Nemo
Outdoor without it. Software-based licenses are not available.

If the following error message appears, please contact Nemo Technical Support at
nemosupport@anite.com. The USB key battery has run out and needs to be changed.

BEFOR E YOU BEG IN

15

No Valid License Detected


If the error message Error: No valid license detected. appears when the application is started,
either the USB key is not plugged in or the key is an unsupported model.
Please follow the instructions for how to read the license information from the existing key. To be able
to use the Nemo Outdoor application supported by the old USB key, it is recommended that you
uninstall Nemo Outdoor version 5.4. After un-installation reboot the computer and re-install the
previous version.

No Valid Technical Support Agreement


If the error message below appears, it means that the USB key type is correct, but that the key is
missing valid technical support & maintenance agreement information.

Please follow the instructions for how to read the license information from the existing key with the
Remote Update Utility. To be able to use the Nemo Outdoor application supported by the USB key
without information about the technical support agreement, it is recommended that you uninstall Nemo
Outdoor version 5.80. After un-installation reboot the computer and re-install the previous version.

The old USB key

The new USB key

The USB keys are updated using the Remote Update Utility software. Before updating Nemo Outdoor
application please make sure that new key is available. Note that you must use the latest version of
the software which comes with Nemo Outdoor version 5.80, or it can alternatively be downloaded from
Nemo User Club. See the instructions below for updating your Nemo Outdoor USB key.

16

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Updating the USB key (Nemo Outdoor version 5.80 and later)
1. Connect your USB key and start the SecureUpdate by selecting Start | All Programs | Nemo
Tools | Remote Update Utility.
2. The Collect Key Status Information tab opens.

3. Click Collect Information. If the Select HASP Key dialog appears, select the HASP HL item and
click OK.

4. Define the location where the C2V file is saved and send the C2V file to Nemo Technical Support
at nemosupport@anite.com.
Please add the following information to the e-mail using the following subject Nemo Outdoor
HASP USB key update:

Company name

First name

Surname

Street address

Zip/ Postal Code

BEFOR E YOU BEG IN

Country

Telephone number

Mobile number

17

5. After you have received the V2C file containing the update, select the Update File in the Apply
License Update tab and click Apply Update.

6. The USB key is now updated. Nemo Outdoor can be installed and is ready for use.

Technical Support Expiration


The new USB keys used with Nemo Outdoor 5.80 and later versions include a compulsory technical
support and maintenance agreement option. The technical support expiration date defines the date
the agreement ends. After this date it is not possible to start the new version of the Nemo Outdoor
application. Example: A customer has purchased Nemo Outdoor version 5.80 with a 1-year technical
support maintenance agreement in April 2011. The customer is entitled for free updates until April
2012. Nemo Outdoor versions released after April 2012 cannot be used with the USB key without
renewing the technical support & maintenance agreement. After the technical support & maintenance
agreement is renewed, the key can be updated remotely and the customer can update the application
to the latest version.

18

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

IMPORTANT

Installing and running Nemo Outdoor requires administrator rights.

Do not upgrade, root, or reflash your measurement terminal firmware. Doing so will cause the
terminal to permanently lose its measurement capability!
The Nemo Outdoor user must be appropriately trained and should be familiar with the signaling behind
wireless technologies.
The Qualcomm handlers enables the use of Qualcomm CDMA2000, MSM6500, MSM6800, TM6200,
TM6250, TM6275, TM6275US, TM7200, and TM8200 chipset-based terminals that have not been
verified by Anite Finland. These terminals can be used with Nemo Outdoor but Anite Finland does not
guarantee that the terminals will work flawlessly. Please check the Nemo Outdoor product description
for a list of measurement terminals verified and approved by Anite Finland.
Do not use the Nemo Outdoor test mobiles keypad to make or answer calls when the Nemo Outdoor
system is running.
With Samsung terminals the key tone volume should be turned off. Otherwise, the mobile can dial a
wrong number.
With Nokia GSM, GPRS, and EDGE terminals the test display (Net Monitor) must not be activated.
In voice quality measurements the volume of the mobile headset must be adjusted to correct levels.
Please refer to the Nemo Voice Quality Guide document.
Do not place stickers containing metal on the mobile because it may lower the transmission power of
the mobile.
After the measurements have been completed and it is desired to take the Nemo Outdoor test mobile
into normal use, it must be powered off and on again to deselect/deactivate the Nemo Outdoor
triggered events in the mobile.
Use only the supplied connecting cable, included with the Nemo Outdoor, for connecting the Nemo
Outdoor test devices to the computers USB port.
When using the Nemo Outdoor test mobile for measurement use, the battery operation time is
reduced from normal use. The best operation times will be achieved when the batteries are regularly
charged and discharged as instructed in the mobile user manual.

Local Laws and Regulations


Note that the local laws and/or regulations may set limitations, restrictions or other obligations on the
use of the Nemo Outdoor and/or the test devices. Observe the laws and regulations of the country (as
well as of any other relevant jurisdiction) where the Nemo Outdoor and/or test device is used. Anite
Finland Ltd assumes no responsibility or liability arising from the failure to comply with the local laws
and/or regulations.

Nemo Outdoor Laptop Settings


The laptops used for running Nemo Outdoor need to be set up before measurements. Below are
described the most important settings that may have an effect on the measurement results.

BEFOR E YOU BEG IN

19

Power Options
Before you begin using Nemo Outdoor, you need to set the power management options of the laptop
to High performance to avoid disruptions in the performance of Nemo Outdoor. Go to Control Panel |
System and Security | Power Options. Select the High performance power plan.

20

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Active Protection System


If there is a system that detects acceleration in the laptop and causes the hard disk to stop when
jolted, it should be turned off. Otherwise, there may be breaks in measurement data. In voice quality
testing there may be missing MOS scores, and with other test devices, gaps in the measurement data.
With Lenovo laptops, select Control Panel | System and Security | Lenovo Airbag Protection. On
the Configuration page, deselect the Enable Active Protection System option.

BEFOR E YOU BEG IN

21

USB Hub Properties


Also, check the generic USB hub properties. Go to Device Manager, expand the Universal Serial
Bus controllers item, right-click the Generic USB Hub item and select Properties. Open the Power
Management tab and check that the Allow the computer to turn off this device to save power
option is deselected. Repeat this for all the Generic USB Hub items.

Traffic Safety
Do not operate Nemo Outdoor and drive (or walk) at the same time. Remember, traffic safety comes
first.
Note that in some countries it is illegal to drive a car and operate a computer at the same time. Please
observe the legislation of the country where the measurements are performed. Finland assumes no
responsibility or liability arising from the failure to comply with local legislation.
Always observe the local speed limits and traffic regulations when conducting drive testing.

Operating Environment
Do not operate Nemo Outdoor without reading the User Manual, including its warnings, for the devices
used by Nemo Outdoor.
Always stop using Nemo Outdoor and switch off the Nemo Outdoor test device(s) when it is forbidden
to use radio equipment or when it may cause interference or danger.
Do not use the Nemo Outdoor test device(s) in a hospital. It may interfere with nearby electronic
devices.
Never use Nemo Outdoor in an aircraft. The use of mobiles in an aircraft may be dangerous.
Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in gas stations, fuel depots, chemical plants, or
sites where blasting operations are in progress.

22

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

NEMO OUTDOOR SYSTEM OVERVIEW


VOICE TESTING
The voice testing environment consists of Nemo Outdoor compatible mobiles and a PC (user provided
or, optionally, provided by Anite Finland with all the software installed). The package also includes the
necessary connecting cables, serial or USB port adapters, a GPS receiver, and fast frequency
scanners if applicable. Also the Nemo Voice Quality option is available.

CIRCUIT-SWITCHED DATA TESTING


The circuit-switched (CS) data testing environment consists of three parts: a measurement unit (Nemo
Outdoor), an application server, and a dial-up server. The dial-up server is used to establish a data
connection between the measurement unit and the application server. Nemo Data Test Server can be
used as the application server. It is a Linux-based administration-free server having up to four public
IP addresses and it can serve multiple simultaneous TCP/IP connections from test terminals. Nemo
Data Test Server supports FTP, SFTP, HTTP, POP3, SMTP, IPerf for UDP/TCP, Ping, Trace route
testing and RTSP (video streaming). CS data testing is possible on all cellular technologies that
support circuit-switched data.
The data measurement system has two modes: Send and Receive. In the Send mode, the
measurement unit sends data packets to the application server; in the Receive mode vice versa. If you
are using a FTP server, the measurement unit uploads (Send mode) or downloads (Receive mode)
test files to or from the FTP server. If you are using an HTTP server, the measurement unit can only
receive files.
The user can define the number of timeslots and the coding schemes, which in turn define the desired
transfer rate. During the measurement, the user will be able to monitor data throughputs and error
rates on different network layers, as well as certain parameters, such as coding scheme and number
of timeslots.

N EM O OUTD OOR SYST EM O VER VIEW

23

PACKET-SWITCHED DATA TESTING


The packet-switched (PS) data testing environments consist of two ends: the measurement unit and
an application server. Nemo Data Test Server can be used as the application server. It is a Linuxbased administration-free server having up to four public IP addresses and it can serve multiple
simultaneous TCP/IP connections from test terminals. Nemo Data Test Server supports FTP, SFTP,
HTTP, POP3, SMTP, IPerf for UDP/TCP, Ping, Trace route testing, and RTSP (video streaming). PS
data testing is possible on all cellular technologies that support packet-switched data.
The data measurement system has two modes: Send and Receive. In the Send mode, the
measurement unit sends data packets to the application server; in the Receive mode vice versa. If you
are using an FTP server, the measurement unit uploads (Send mode) or downloads (Receive mode)
test files to or from the FTP server. If you are using an HTTP server, the measurement unit can only
receive files.
During the measurement, the user will be able to monitor data throughputs and error rates on different
network layers, as well as certain parameters such as coding scheme and number of timeslots.

NEMO MEDIA ROUTER


Nemo Media Router (NMR) is Anite Finland Ltds proprietary communications interface and application
developed for Android-based smartphones. With the NMR interface, smartphones communicate with
PC-based applications, such as, Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Invex, enabling voice quality
(PESQ/POLQA) measurements and data transfers on smartphones without any additional hardware.
When performing voice quality measurements with NMR, the smartphone records the received sample
audio files and transfers audio files via the NMR interface to the test computer in real time. The
computer calculates the PESQ/POLQA MOS scores and the values are written in the Nemo Outdoor
log file. Six phones can be connected to one CPU simultaneously.
Also data transfers can be made using Nemo Media Router installed on the smartphone.

NMR versions 1.0 and 1.1 are not supported with Nemo Outdoor version 7.3.0.x. Customers
using Nemo Media Router 1.0 or 1.1 should not update Nemo Outdoor to the latest version
before updating the Nemo Media Router application on the test handsets. Nemo Media Router
application and update instructions are available from the Nemo User Club
http://nemouserclub.anite.com. File NemoMediaRouter.apk is located under Nemo Outdoor
7.3.0.6.

NMR Voice Quality Testing Option can be fetched from NMR license server automatically for all
the currently fielded units by launching the Nemo Media Router 2.00 application on the phone
after installation.

24

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Installing Nemo Media Router


This chapter will describe the steps for setting up and configuring Nemo Media Router. Handsets
ordered with Nemo Media Route come preinstalled from Anite Finland. If you wish to use your existing
Nemo Outdoor test terminals, please install the Nemo Media Router first. Please check the Nemo
Media Router data sheet for a list of supported devices.
Requirements:

Nemo Handy firmware

AutoTether application must be removed (applies to existing Galaxy SIII handsets delivered with
Nemo Outdoor/ Nemo Invex)

Device USB port must be configured to Memory Card Mode (MTP)

1. If the AutoTether tool is installed on the device, remove it via Applications manager. Select
Settings | Applications manager.

N EM O OUTD OOR SYST EM O VER VIEW

25

2. Select AutoTether and then tap Uninstall. After uninstallation, reboot the device.

3. Configure the USB port to memory card mode. Open the dialer on your mobile and enter *#7284#.

26

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

4. Select Qualcomm USB Settings.

5. Select MTP.

Note that it may take a while before computer recognizes device after USB port mode has been
changed

6. Next install the Nemo Media Router on the mobile (if not preinstalled by Anite Finland). Connect
the device to your laptop with a USB cable. Copy the NemoMediaRouter.apk file on your device in
the Nemo folder.

N EM O OUTD OOR SYST EM O VER VIEW

27

7. Select Apps | My files on your device and browse to the Nemo folder. Tap the
NemoMediaRouter.apk file.

8. Select Install. When the installation is finished, select Open.

9. After the Nemo Media Router application has started, restart the device.
10. When the device has restarted, connect the device with Nemo Outdoor/Nemo Invex as instructed
in the Dial-up Networking Setup Guide included in the Nemo Outdoor product package.

28

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

11. When the device is connected with Nemo Outdoor/Invex, the Nemo Media Router application is
started automatically. If the Nemo Media Router does not appear, start the application manually,
reboot the device, and try again adding the device to Nemo Outdoor.
12. The Outdoor option should be selected as the USB configuration. The Mass memory and Mass
memory ADB options are not needed with Nemo Outdoor.

13. In the Device Configuration Port settings page, select Automatic in the Nemo Media Router
field and define the correct Trace and Modem ports. Click OK. The device is now ready.

N EM O OUTD OOR SYST EM O VER VIEW

29

Updating the Nemo Media Router License


After installation, existing Nemo Media Router users can fetch the new license from the NMR license
server automatically by launching the Nemo Media Router 2.00 application on the phone.
In the License Browser view, select the correct license.

Confirm by selecting Load.

After the license has been loaded, the device needs to be restarted. Once the device restarts, you can
connect the device to Nemo Outdoor. Nemo Media Router will start automatically.

30

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI


The 3rd generation Nemo Outdoor Multi is a compact and cost-effective benchmarking solution to be
used with Nemo Outdoor. The system in combination with Nemo Outdoor Multi-option allows
benchmarking measurements to be performed on different system technologies such as GSM, EDGE,
WCDMA, HSDPA, CDMA2000, and WiMAX, and different combinations of measurement modes such
as voice calls and data transfers. Nemo Outdoor Multi supports a total of seven test devices, i.e. up to
five test mobiles, scanners, and a GPS device. The Multi-Data functionality in Nemo Outdoor allows
up to five concurrent data measurements to be performed simultaneously while the system is
connected to a single laptop, saving space in the test vehicle during drive testing and adding to the
ease of use of the system. Combined with Nemo Server, Nemo Outdoor Multi-Data makes it easy to
carry out, not only casual data benchmarking test cases that can be used to compare the performance
of different technologies or operators, but also long-term network performance measurements.
All test devices can be connected to Nemo Outdoor Multi through an onboard USB port while sharing
a cars +12VDC power output. The Nemo Outdoor multi unit includes a built-in 2500 mAh battery pack
which makes it possible to continue measurements during short power failures without stopping the
measurements. With the professional high-quality lockable USB data cable connection the system is
very reliable to use, preventing loose connections between test devices and the main unit. Nemo
Outdoor Multi can also be delivered with an optional tough roll-around carrying case. The system is by
default delivered with a car mounting kit that allows the unit to be semi-permanently mounted into a
test car. The Multi system also includes a DC to AC pure sine wave power inverter to supply power for
the laptop.

N EM O OUTD OOR SYST EM O VER VIEW

31

NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI LITE


The 4th generation Nemo Multi Lite is a compact and cost-effective benchmarking solution for use with
Nemo Outdoor. Benchmarking measurements can be performed on various system technologies and
networks with support for up to six test mobiles/data cards, a scanner and a sound card. In addition,
the system in combination with Nemo Outdoor Multi-option allows the use of different combinations of
measurement modes such as voice calls, voice quality calls and data transfers simultaneously. The
system is connected to a single laptop, saving space in the test vehicle during drive testing and adding
to the ease of use of the system.

32

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

NEMO INVEX

Nemo Invex system combines powerful intuitive software and scalable military grade hardware design
to create superior drive-test systems for wireless networks. Quick and easy to deploy, Nemo Invex
provides critical quality-of-service (QoS) measurements and a wide variety of quality-of-experience
(QoE) service testing, including the latest voice and video quality measurement algorithms. Nemo
Invex is flexible and scalable, capable of evolving as the network evolves providing the lowest
effective total cost of ownership available.
The Nemo Outdoor software application that runs on the Nemo Invex chassis for benchmarking is also
widely known as a tool for network optimization. With other benchmarking tools QoS statistics can be
collected but no actual reasons for possible issues, such as, low data rates can be seen without a
cause identified. Often the network issue is interference and other benchmarking tools are collecting
quality parameters but no real time analysis is performed. The Nemo solutions allow the user to
activate different interference analysis measurements, such as, WCDMA pilot pollution, GSM cochannel/ adjacent channel interference and GSM/ WCDMA missing neighbor detection. These
enhanced capabilities help to save time and money and provide additional value added information
also to benchmarking campaigns. Furthermore, significant cost savings can be realized by bundling
the data collection solution with a post-processing solution as Anite has a comprehensive postprocessing solution, Nemo Analyze.

N EM O OUTD OOR SYST EM O VER VIEW

33

INDOOR MEASUREMENTS
Nemo Outdoor has an indoor measurement option in which case Nemo Outdoor can be installed on a
Tablet PC. Alternatively, a regular laptop can be used as well. As GPS receivers cannot be used
indoors, the indoor option offers a marker function to store location data. Just click markers along the
measurement route and the route will be drawn on the map. It is also possible to use BTS files with
floorplans. With Nemo Walker, test equipment can be easily taken inside buildings.

34

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

INSTALLING NEMO OUTDOOR SYSTEM


This section provides the basic instructions for installing Nemo Outdoor software and devices. Make
sure you have all the listed equipment before starting the software installation. Use the Nemo Outdoor
setup program to install Nemo Outdoor; that is, do not just copy the Nemo Outdoor files onto your
computer.

Note that for Windows 7 and Windows 8, the installation must be run under Administrator
account or other user account with administrative privileges. Note that if the existing Nemo
Outdoor version is 6.2.1.x or older it must be uninstalled via add or remove programs before the
Nemo Outdoor 7.x installation can be ran. During Sentinel HASP driver installation, you are
prompted to restart the computer. Press Restart later to continue with the Nemo Outdoor
installation.

HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS

PC (Lenovo or Dell recommended) with Windows 7 Professional (32/ 64- bit) Windows 8
Professional (32/ 64- bit). Windows 7 Professional is highly recommended

Pentium III processor, minimum 1GHz, preferably 1.7 GHz for single mobile measurements

For multi data measurements Intel Core Duo processor T2500 2.00GHz or higher required.
Intel Core i7 recommended

For voice quality measurements with up to four channels with USB sound card Intel Core Duo
processor T2500 2.00GHz or higher required. Intel Core i7 recommended

For up to six channel voice quality measurements with USB sound card Intel Quad
Core processor Q9100 2.26GHz or higher required. Intel Core i7 recommended

512MB RAM minimum, 1GB RAM recommended

For multi data measurements with HSPA+ devices Intel Quad Core processor Q9100
2.26GHz or higher required. Intel Core i7 recommended

100 MB of free hard disk space for installation and use; 1 GB recommended

One USB port for copy protection module

One USB port per mobile

Depending on the scanner used, one USB port or serial port or RJ45 or FireWire port per scanner

One serial port for each voice quality audio module or one USB port per sound card

One USB port for an external GPS receiver

Display resolution 1400 x 900 recommended

IN ST AL L ING N EMO OUTD OOR SYST EM

35

OTHER HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS


The following hardware is also supported for using Nemo Outdoor. Please note that the scanning
receivers and many of the GPS receivers require also +12 V DC power supply (e.g., from cigarette
lighter plug).

External power supply recommended for computer if vehicle mounted

GPS receiver: (optional, following types are supported)

Garmin GPS II

Garmin GPS II Plus

Garmin GPS III/III+

Garmin GPS 35

Garmin V

Garmin 18 USB

Trimble Placer 450/455 (TAIP) and GPS antenna unit

Most other GPS receivers with NMEA 0183 compatible output

Nemo Outdoor software is protected with a HASP USB key (see Licensing)

NEMO OUTDOOR SOFTWARE INSTALLATION


To install or upgrade Nemo Outdoor:

If you have a previous version of Nemo Outdoor installed, please remove it before installation.
Go to Control Panel and select Programs | Uninstall a program. Righ-click on Nemo Outdoor
and select Uninstall.
1. Start Windows and insert the Nemo Outdoor CD-ROM in your CD drive (e.g., drive D).

Note that installation must be run under Administrator account or other user account with
administrative privileges.
2. Select Start | Run in the Windows Status bar. Type D:\Nemo Outdoor\Nemo Outdoor x.xx.xx in the
Open field (xx refers to the version number) and click the OK button. When the Installation
program starts, follow the instructions on your screen. We recommend that you select the
Complete setup type.
3. When the Nemo Outdoor software installation is complete, you will need to restart the computer.

To uninstall Nemo Outdoor:


1. Go to Control Panel and select Programs | Uninstall a program. Righ-click on Nemo Outdoor
and select Uninstall.

Note that uninstallation must be run under Administrator account or other user account with
administrative privileges.

36

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

NEMO OUTDOOR DEVICE SET-UP


Below you will find instructions for connecting devices to the Nemo Outdoor measurement system.
However, instructions for devices that require a dial-up connection can be found in the Dial-Up
Networking Setup Guide.

Connecting a GPS Receiver


1. Plug the GPS USB cable into a USB port on your computer.
2. Windows will automatically detect the new device and install the necessary drivers.
3. Start Nemo Outdoor. Open the Configuration Manager, select Device and click the Add button
.
4. Click on GPS. Select your GPS model from the list and click Next.
5. Select the USB port to which your GPS receiver is connected. The program automatically sets the
other parameters to match your navigator selection according to the following table:
Navigator Type

Baud rate

Data bits

Parity

Stop
bits

Garmin 18 USB

9600

None

6. Click OK. Your GPS receiver is now ready for measurements.

Connecting a Scanner
See the Nemo Scanner Guide document for information on how to connect and start scanners with
Nemo Outdoor.

Connecting Voice Quality Devices


Please refer to the Nemo Voice Quality Guide document for complete installation and configuration
instructions.

IN ST AL L ING N EMO OUTD OOR SYST EM

37

NEMO INVEX DEVICE SET-UP


After the Nemo Invex chassis has been set up and configured, you can connect the measurement
servers (UIC modules in the Nemo Invex chassis) and devices to Nemo Outdoor. Start Nemo Outdoor
with the Nemo Invex license option. Click the Measurement servers
button in the Devices view.
A list of available measurement servers is displayed. Select Add | Autodetect Measurement Servers
to find all measurement servers connected to the system. If a measurement server is missing from the
list, click the Add button and select Add Measurement Server Name. Enter the server name (IP
address) and click OK. Nemo Outdoor will try to connect to the server.

To connect to a measurement server, select the server and click Connect. The State will change to
Connected. Repeat this for each measurement server that you want to connect with Nemo Outdoor.
Finally, click Close.

38

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

The Devices view will display all connected measurement servers. The Local item refers to devices
connected directly to the Nemo Outdoor laptop. Click the Autodetect button to detect devices
connected to the measurement servers.

A list of devices connected to each measurement server is displayed. In the Mode column, define
whether the device will be used for voice, data, or voice and data measurements. Read chapter Two
Data Connections on One Measurement Server for more information on having two active data
connections on a single measurement server.

IN ST AL L ING N EMO OUTD OOR SYST EM

39

If you are adding a scanner, click the scanner name and select the frequency configuration supported
by the scanner.

Finally click Add Devices. The devices will be added to Nemo Outdoor. Depending on the number of
devices, this may take a few minutes.
The Nemo FSR1 scanner needs to be added manually. Click the Add or remove devices button in
the Devices view and select Add New Device. In the Add New Device dialog, select the Nemo FSR1
and select a UIC in the field at the bottom of the dialog.

40

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Click the Group devices by type/server button


by server.

to group the devices by type (phone or scanner) or

IN ST AL L ING N EMO OUTD OOR SYST EM

41

The Device Status view displays all the connected devices and their status. By resizing the view, you
can change how the devices are organized.

42

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Right-click on the Device Status view and select Toggle Status Window Docking Area to dock the
Status view to the top of the main view.

Right-click on the Device Status view and select Reorder Devices to change the order of the devices
in the Device Status and Devices views. Drag and drop the devices in the correct order and finally
click OK.

It is possible to save the hardware configuration by selecting File | Save Device Configuration As.
This way all the devices can be loaded automatically the next time you start Nemo Outdoor.

IN ST AL L ING N EMO OUTD OOR SYST EM

43

To disconnect measurement servers, click the Measurement servers button, select a measurement
server and click Disconnect.

Two Data Connections on One Measurement Server


You can have two active data connections on a single measurement server. For example, MMS can
be tested with one test device while another device is performing an FTP transfer. The data routing
option is enabled by default with Nemo Invex allowing more than one active data connection.
However, when routing table modifications is enabled, there are some limitations with data testing. For
example, it is required that different source IP addresses for data testing are used. This means that
the host IP address or URL must be different for each test device.
Routing table modification should be disabled when only one active data connection is required.
Select View | User Interface Properties and set Enable routing table modifications for devices to
No.

If routing table modification is disabled when performing multi (dual) data testing with one
measurement server, problems may be caused when several dial-up connections are opened from
one host computer to the terminals. All data connections to be established travel along one connection
between the host computer and the terminal, i.e. all dial-up connections are routed via one terminal,
not via different terminals and their interfaces. This will distort the test results.

44

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR DRIVE TESTING


Check the condition of all antennas, cables, and connectors: there should be no tight curves, no
slashes or cuts.
Check that connectors are properly connected. Loose connections cause unstable measurements or
wrong attenuation of field strength.
Place antennas properly on the roof of the vehicle. Antennas should be installed as symmetrically as
possible and at least one wavelength from the corners and roof windows, and two wavelengths from
each other. If antennas are too close to each other, it may cause interference.

=c/f
c = 300E6 (m/s)
f = frequency (Hz)
450 MHz, = 66 cm
900 MHz, = 33 cm
1800 MHz, = 17 cm
1900 MHz, = 16 cm
GPS antenna 1565-1575MHz, = 19 cm

Check the configuration before starting the measurement.

Individual antennas and the mobile holder antenna couplers may have different performance.
When removing antennas after a drive test, DO NOT pull antennas from the antenna cables. Hold the
antenna from the base and tilt the antenna away from the cable.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

45

CONFIGURATION SETTINGS
After you have installed Nemo Outdoor, you will need to configure the system for your environment
before you will be able to use the measurement functions. The following instructions will help you in
this initial configuration.

CONFIGURING NEMO OUTDOOR


You have three different ways to start using Nemo Outdoor. For a first-time user the most convenient
way is to start with the Welcome page and proceed from there. Older users of Nemo Outdoor may
want to use the Load Device Configuration dialog, and more advanced users may want to configure
Nemo Outdoor manually.

Configuration through Welcome page


1. The Nemo Outdoor Welcome page offers an easy way to configure the system for a first-time
user, and also helps more advanced users to add new devices. It appears on the screen when
you start Nemo Outdoor. If you do not want to view this window in the future when opening Nemo
Outdoor, select the Do not show this again option.

2. With the Automatic device detection functionality, you can automatically add devices to Nemo
Outdoor without needing to manually set up the system. This functionality automatically searches
the Device Manager for the assigned modem and trace COM port information, and matches a dialup connection with the assigned modem port for the device.

Please note that the automatic detection is only available for devices connected with a USB
cable. Furthermore, you may need to select the correct device model from the drop-down menu.

46

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Note that this functionality varies depending on the device vendor. In addition, you may need to
create a dial-up connection for the device before connecting it to Nemo Outdoor. The COM
ports are created with the dial-up connection. Please refer to the Nemo Outdoor Dial-Up
Networking Setup Guide for instructions on how to do this. The device may also require
additional configurations in its modem settings.
3. You can start the devices in online mode by clicking the Start Devices button below, start them in
offline mode by clicking the Work Offline button, or refresh the device configuration by clicking the
Refresh button on the bottom right-hand corner of the window. This is useful, e.g., when you
accidentally unplug a device and plug it in again.
4. PIN code requests should be turned off for all devices but in case there is a pending PIN code
request for a test device, a dialog will be displayed where you can enter the PIN code. After
pressing OK, PIN code requesting will be disabled from the device.

5. You can also open a workspace file from the Welcome dialog.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

47

6. With the Open a Device Configuration tool you can select saved device configurations. This
includes the dial-up connection and the trace and modem COM ports assigned to the device. If
you would like to start Nemo Outdoor in online mode, select a pre-made device configuration and
a workspace and click Start Devices. All the devices included in the device configuration file will
be activated and you are ready to start measurements.

7. If you prefer setting up the measurement configuration offline, that is, without connecting and
starting the measurement devices, select a pre-made device configuration and click the Work
Offline button. If you want, you can configure the devices manually and activate them. When you
want to activate the devices, connect the devices to the measurement system and click the Work
Offline button
in the Nemo Outdoor toolbar.

48

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

8. The Load a Measurement tool enables you to open a previously viewed measurement with the
attached devices for playback. In the Workspace field you can select a workspace for the
measurement. Click Load Selected Files.

Configuration through Load Device Configuration Dialog


To view the Load Device Configuration dialog, click Other in the Open a Device Configuration
field in the Welcome to Nemo Outdoor window.
1. If you have used Nemo Outdoor previously and saved a device configuration and a workspace,
Nemo Outdoor will ask if you would like to load a device configuration and a workspace. If you are
a first-time user of Nemo Outdoor, go to step 4.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

49

2. If you have used Nemo Outdoor before and would like to start in online mode, select a pre-made
device configuration and a workspace and click Online. All the devices included in the device
configuration file will be activated and you are ready to start measurements.

3. If you prefer setting up the measurement configuration offline, that is, without connecting and
starting the measurement devices, select a pre-made device configuration and click the Offline
button in the Load Device Configuration dialog. You can change the measurement
configurations in the offline mode and activate the device. When you want to activate the devices,
connect the devices to the measurement system and click the Work Online button
in the
Nemo Outdoor toolbar.
4. In the Load Device Configuration dialog, select Empty Device Configuration and click Start
Devices. An empty Nemo Outdoor main window appears.
5. Add a device by selecting Measurement | Add New Device or by clicking the Add or remove
devices button
in the Devices view. Choose the appropriate phone, scanner, or GPS receiver
from the list and click Next.
6. All Qualcomm terminals are unified into one Qualcomm handler. Nemo Outdoor application
detects the chipset of the test device and activates traces accordingly. For example, if device
supports MDM8200 chipset (HSPA+) these trace messages are automatically activated. Before
trace message activation application is checking is the licence valid for such a device. If license do
not cover e.g. MDM8200 devices (HSPA+ devices), device is added to Nemo Outdoor application
with an other chipset support e.g. MDM7200 (HSUPA) and HSPA+ trace messages are not
activated. The following Qualcomm chipsets are supported:

Qualcomm TM6200

Qualcomm TM6250

Qualcomm TM6275 - Compatible with Qualcomm HSDPA devices

Qualcomm TM6275 US - Compatible with Qualcomm HSDPA devices

50

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Qualcomm TM6280 - Compatible with Qualcomm HSDPA devices

Qualcomm TM7200 - Compatible with Qualcomm HSUPA devices

Qualcomm TM8200 - Compatible with Qualcomm HSPA+ devices

Qualcomm TM8220 - Compatible with Qualcomm HSPA+ dual carrier devices

Qualcomm MDM9200 - Compatible with Qualcomm LTE devices

Qualcomm MDM9600 - Compatible with Qualcomm LTE devices

7. A properties dialog will be opened for the selected device. Set the appropriate values.
8. Click on Measurement Properties in the Device Configuration dialog to enter the Measurement
Properties dialog. Here you will find device-specific measurement settings. Set the appropriate
parameters and click OK.
9. Double-click the User Interface item in the Configuration Manager
(alt+M) to open the User
Interface Properties dialog. Here you will find general measurement settings that affect all devices.
Set the appropriate parameters and click OK. You can now start the measurements.

Configuring Nemo Outdoor Manually


If you want to configure Nemo Outdoor manually, close the Welcome page or Load Device
Configuration dialog when you start Nemo Outdoor. You can go to File | Open Measurement, and
select a saved measurement for playback, or you can open a saved device configuration in File |
Open Device Configuration and start a measurement in online or offline mode. Alternatively, you can
go to Measurement | Add New Device, select a device and configure it for measurements.
In addition, you can use the Autodetect devices functionality which automatically detects a previously
added device and its assigned COM ports and dial-up connection for network measurements. Click
the Autodetect Devices button in the toolbar.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

51

A dialog with a list of previously added devices and their dial-up connections appears. In the Label
field you can type a name for the device. Select the devices you want to add, and click the Add
Devices tab at the bottom of the Autodetect Devices dialog.

52

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Use Case 1. Start Measurements Automatically upon Device


Startup
The following example case exemplifies the process of setting up Nemo Outdoor to start recording
automatically when devices are connected and started.
In the Nemo Outdoor main view, perform the following configurations.
1. Go to View | User Interface Properties.
2. On the Measurement page, set the Start recording automatically when devices are started
and Start scripts automatically options to Yes.

3. Click OK.
4. Save the workspace and hardware configuration files by selecting File | Save Workspace As,
and File | Save Device Configuration As.
5. Close Nemo Outdoor. The next time you start Nemo Outdoor, measurements will start
automatically as long as the correct device configuration file and workspace are selected.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

53

CONFIGURING TEST MOBILES


The Phone Settings of the Nemo Outdoor test mobile can be user defined. However, the PIN Code
Request and Automatic Redial options must be turned OFF. Please consult the mobile user
manual to find these options from the mobile. To configure the Nemo Outdoor test mobiles for PS data
testing purposes, see the Dial-Up Networking Setup guide provided by Anite Finland.

Always keep the test mobile connected to a charger, if possible, when carrying out
measurements.
Net Monitoring must be switched off with the Nokia mobiles listed below:

Nokia 6230i

CONFIGURATION MANAGER
Configuring Nemo Outdoor for your environment is accomplished in the Configuration Manager. You
can access the view either by pressing Ctrl+M or by clicking the Configuration Manager toolbar
button .
The Configuration Manager view consists of several items. Select an item from the list and click the
Properties button (if applicable) to edit the item.

The System Properties view shows the general system properties for Nemo Outdoor.

54

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Under Measurement Servers are listed all Nemo Invex measurement servers connected to the
system. Select a server to view some hardware status information for the server.

Handler Information

Under Handler Information, you will find a list of handlers that have been installed on your computer.
All the handlers that you have purchased can be found on the Nemo Outdoor installation CD-ROM.
Each device has its own handler, and in order to use them in Nemo Outdoor, you must have the
corresponding handler installed.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

55

User Interface

Under the User Interface item, you will find several items. Double-click on the User Interface
Properties item to open the User Interface Properties dialog.
The Custom Windows folder contains premade measurement windows for quick startup. Under Color
Palettes you will find colors used in the views (see User Interface Properties Colors). Clicking on
Color Sets will display the available color sets in the Configuration Manager view. For further
information on how to create color sets, see chapter Color Set Editor. You can define the format in
which various parameter values are presented through the Presentation modes item (see User
Interface Properties Presentation).

56

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Operators and CDMA Operators displays a list of operator names along with the respective MCC
and MNC codes. To add new operators to the list, double-click the Operators or CDMA Operators item
in the Configuration Manage and click the Add button.

Enter the Operator name, MCC, and MNC. For CDMA operators, add the operator name and SID.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

57

User Interface Properties General

Save workspace settings on exit option defines whether the workspace settings are saved when
you exit the SW so that they will be activated automatically, for example, windows will be opened the
next time you start the SW.
Selecting the Show a dialog for critical errors option will display a message box when there is a
problem with one of the devices or with the measurement file writing.
Select the Open Script Status window when script is started option to automatically open the
Script Status window when script files are used in measurements.
Select the Play audio quality samples during playback option to play the audio samples used in
audio quality measurements also during playback.
When the Show welcome window when application is launched option is selected, the Welcome to
Nemo Outdoor window is displayed.
Selecting the Show Close Full Screen window in Full Screen mode option will enable you to exit
the Full Screen mode through an UI button.
With the Show 'Debug log file management' dialog on exit option selected, a debug file will be
generated when Nemo Outdoor is closed.
When the Include device number in audio notification option is selected, the device number is
included at the beginning of the notification audio alert.
With the Load workspace on startup option you can define which workspace is loaded when Nemo
Outdoor is started.

58

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

With the Load hardware configuration on startup option you can define which hardware
configuration is loaded when Nemo Outdoor is started.
With the Start measurement list on startup option you can define which measurement list is loaded
and started when Nemo Outdoor is started.
When the Enable route history option is selected, a GPX (GPS Exchange Format) file is generated
from the measurement. A GPX file is also generated when loading playback files. GPX is a lightweight XML data format for the interchange of GPS data (waypoints, routes, and tracks) between
applications and web services on the Internet.

User Interface Properties Measurement


By double-clicking the Measurement item in the Configuration Manager window you will access the
Measurement tab in the User Interface Properties dialog. Here you can make settings affecting all
measurements.

Filename defines the filename format. The default format is %y%b%d %H%M%S (year-month-day
hours-minutes-seconds, e.g., 06May31 165246) but you can use any combination of the items below.
For example, "%y%b%d_%n means that the filename looks as follows: 06May31_1. The last number
(%n) is the sequence number for measurement files recorded that day. You can also create custom
filename templates. See chapter Creating Filename Templates.
%a

Abbreviated weekday name

%A

Full weekday name

%b

Abbreviated month name

%B

Full month name

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

59

%d

Day of month as decimal number (01 31)

%H

Hour in 24-hour format (00 23)

%I

Hour in 12-hour format (01 12)

%j

Day of year as decimal number (001 366)

%m

Month as decimal number (01 12)

%M

Minute as decimal number (00 59)

%n

Sequence number (1 )

%N

Sequence number (1 )

%p

Current locale's A.M./P.M. indicator for 12-hour clock

%S

Second as decimal number (00 59)

%U

Week of year as decimal number, with Sunday as first day of week (00 53)

%w

Weekday as decimal number (0 6; Sunday is 0)

%W

Week of year as decimal number, with Monday as first day of week (00 53)

%y

Year without century, as decimal number (00 99)

%Y

Year with century, as decimal number

%z

Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation, depending on registry settings;
no characters if time zone is unknown

%Z

Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation, depending on registry settings;
no characters if time zone is unknown

With the Start scripts automatically option, you can order Nemo Outdoor to start executing the script
file when you click the Start Recording button

in the main window.

With the Force idle mode when stopping scripts option you can force the measurement mobile to
return to idle mode if the script is interrupted. When the option is set to No, the mobile will stay in the
current state when script is stopped. You can use this option to keep a GPRS mobile in active state
when toggling a script on and off.

Please note that it is recommended that with LTE devices this option is set to No. If attach/
detach commands are needed frequently, for example, with script files it is suggested that radio
off/radio on commands are used instead of attach/detach.
Select the Stop measurement after script is finished option to force Nemo Outdoor to stop
recording after the script is finished.
If you are making measurements with multiple devices and multiple scripts, select the Synchronize
script repeats option to force Nemo Outdoor to wait until all scripts for all devices are finished before
repeating the scripts.
Select the Prevent script stopping during connection establishment option to delay the script
stopping if any of the devices has a call or connection attempt ongoing.

60

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

With the Use time from GPS option you can order Nemo Outdoor to use GPS time at the start of the
measurement. During measurements, Nemo Outdoor will use PC time.
Select the Wait for GPS fix before starting measurement option if you would like to start measuring
only after there is a GPS fix.
Select the Enable automatic measurement pausing option to initiate an automatic pause when GPS
velocity goes under X km/h for X seconds. Logging will be resumed automatically after the GPS
velocity exceeds the user-specified limit X.
GPS time offset value specifies the difference between GPS UTC time and local time. This offset is
used by handlers when GPS time synchronization is performed.
Select the Redial after dropped call option to automatically make a new call if a call is dropped
during measurements. Also define the time in seconds after which the call will be redialed.
Remove all forcing functions when device is started option deactivates all forcing functions from
the device when the device is started.
When the Use ETSI compatible call connection trigger option is set to Yes, Outdoor uses the ETSI
specification-based definition of the start and end time of a call.
Enable ETSI call timeout option changes the call attempt timeout to terminate at CAC 2 event. By
default, call attempt timeout terminates at CAC 1 event. See the Nemo File Format specification (Help
| Nemo File Format) for more information on the events.
With the Enable routing table modifications for local devices option users can enable and disable
routing table modification. The option is selected by default. Routing table modification should be
disabled only with single data testing. If routing table modification is disabled with multi data testing, it
can cause problems when several dial-up connections are opened from one host computer to
terminals. All data connections to be established travel along one connection between the host
computer and the terminal, i.e. all dial-up connections are routed via one terminal, not via different
terminals and their interfaces. This distorts the test results.
Buffer size specifies the number of events stored in the history buffer of the user interface. The size
of the buffer affects how far back you can view a file during measurement.
Selecting the Start recording automatically when devices are started option enables Nemo
Outdoor to start recording automatically at device startup, and also when changing from offline mode
to online mode.
Selecting the Show report after measurement ends option will display a summary of all test calls
after the measurement is ended.
Selecting the Show FTP send dialog before sending measurement to server option will display the
Send Measurement to FTP Server dialog after the measurement is ended and before the log files
are sent to an FTP server. See chapter Uploading Measurement Files to Server for more information.
Selecting the Show 'Pause' dialog when measurement is paused option will display a message
when the measurement has been paused.
With the Show Stop Recording Query dialog before recording is stopped option selected, a
dialog appears at the end of the measurement to make sure you really want to stop recording.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

61

When the Show Enable Missing Neighbor Query dialog when recording is started option is
selected, a notification dialog will appear reminding you to enable missing neighbor detection when a
scanner and a test terminal are connected to Nemo Outdoor and missing neighbor detection is not
currently enabled. If you agree to enable the missing neighbor detection functionality through the
dialog, the Missing Neighbor Detection dialog will appear. However, note that you are not able to
enable the missing neighbor functionality if active measurement properties do not support missing
neighbor detection. In that case recording must be stopped and measurement properties changed
before the missing neighbor functionality can be enabled.
Selecting the Start recording when incoming call is received option enables Nemo Outdoor to start
recording automatically when a test call is received.
Select the Compress measurement file(s) option to automatically compress the files below into a
single measurement archive (ZIP file). After the files are compressed, the original files are deleted.

measurement files (.nmf)

binary files (.nbl)

packet capture files (.pcap)

marker files (.mrk)

indoor map files (.tab and image)Creating Filename Templates


You can create templates for naming measurement log files. The template includes parameters (tags)
and a list of allowed values for each parameter. The template also specifies the filename format which
defines how the tags are used in the filename. The templates can be exported and imported.
Double-click the Filename item on the User Interface Properties Measurement page to open the
Filename Editor. Click the Add button to add a custom parameter.

62

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

In the Parameter Editor dialog, type a name for the new parameter. Then click the New button
to
add the possible values for the parameter. For example, add a parameter called city and then add a
list of cities where you conduct measurements. Finally click OK to return to the Filename Editor.

The new parameter is listed in the Parameters table. You can add as many parameters as needed. In
the Filename field, define the filename format where you can now use your custom parameters.
Below the Filename field you can see what the filename will look like with the selected parameters.

When you start logging, you will be asked to select a value for the custom parameter. This value will
be used in the filename.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

63

64

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

User Interface Properties Paths

In the Paths tab you can define locations for different files. In the picture above, you can see the
default values. To change the default paths, click on the button and browse for a new location. In
the Default Map field, you can enter a map file that will be opened by default. A World.tab map file is
provided by Anite Finland in the installation package. Local Files refers to the files that are used in
FTP testing. Report Files are the files created during timeslot testing. Default Color Set refers to the
color set that is opened by default on the map. For instructions on making new color sets, see chapter
Color Set Editor.
Nemo Outdoor offers male and female sound files for notifications In the Sounds field, select C:\Nemo
Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Sounds\Female if you want to use female sounds or C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo
Shared Files\Sounds\Male if you want to use male sounds.

Note that BTS files and script files do not apply to scanners.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

65

User Interface Properties Presentation

In the Presentation tab you can define the format in which various parameter values are presented.

User Interface Properties Colors

66

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

In the Colors page you can define colors used for devices, graph lines, and map routes. The first eight
colors are reserved for devices. The other colors are used to draw graph lines and map routes.
To make new palettes, click the New button, type a name for the new palette, and define all the colors.
To change the palette, select a palette from the Color palette list.

Notifications

Notifications are graphical, textual, and audio notifications marking certain events. Nemo Outdoor
includes some premade notifications, but you can also add your own notifications. The notifications
come in handy when you are looking for certain events, parameters, or values in the measurement
file. Depending on your configuration, Nemo Outdoor will either play a sound or display a .png image
in a graph/map when the defined event occurs during measurements. A textual notification is
displayed in the Output window by default.
By double-clicking a notification, the Notifications window appears. There you can make changes to,
for example, sound files and icons associated with the notification.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

67

Notification Configuration
To make your own notifications, select the Notifications item in the Configuration Manager window and
double-click any notification to open the Notifications dialog. Alternatively select View | Notification
Manager.
The dialog displays all existing notifications. From the table you can see the notification title and the
selected sound and bitmap file for each notification. Activate a sound and/or bitmap file for a
notification by selecting and clearing the options in the list.

68

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Sound file defines an audio file for the selected notification. Browse a sound file in the field or use the
default file. Nemo Outdoor offers male and female sound files. In the User Interface Properties Paths
dialog, define which one you would like to use. Use the Play button to listen to the file. If you want to
attach your own sound files (.wav) to the notifications, you should create the sound files and add them
in the folder C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Sounds\Male or C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Shared
Files\Sounds\Female.
Bitmap file defines a graphical notification for the selected notification. Browse a bitmap file in the
field or use the default file. The button will display a preview of the selected image. If you want to
attach your own bitmaps to the notifications, you should create the files and add them in the folder
C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Images.
Click the Add button to create new notifications in the Notification Criteria dialog.

Title defines a name for the notification.


Notify when these criteria are met table displays the criteria for the selected notification. You can
define a counter that specifies how many times the notification rules must match consecutively before
the notification is triggered.
Select the Notify only once when criteria are met option when you want be notified about certain
events only once.
Select the parameter that you want to use in the notification. Then define the Condition and Value for
the selected parameter and click Add to list to add the new criteria for the notification. You can add
several criteria for each notification. Finally click OK and the notification is saved and added in the
Notifications dialog where you can attach sound and bitmap files to the notification.
The notification is also available in the Measurement Properties | Notifications dialog where you
can activate the notification for a specific device. Click the Device notification settings button in the
Devices view to open the dialog.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

69

To activate a notification for a particular device, click the Device notification settings button
in
the Devices view. This will open the Measurement Properties, Notifications dialog. Select the
notifications you would like to use in the measurement and click OK.

The table displays a list of notifications that can be activated for the selected device. Select the
notification from the list and select how you would like to be notified. The Notification Properties
button will open the Notification Configuration dialog where you can edit the notification settings
(see chapter Notification Configuration for more information).
By clicking the Select All and Clear All buttons, you can select and clear all items in the list.

To make user-configurable notifications:


1. Open the Notifications dialog (View | Notification Manager) and click Add.
2. In the Notification Criteria dialog, define the notification criteria and click OK.
3. In the Notifications dialog, select the notification that you just created. Define sound and bitmap
files for the notification and activate them by selecting the options in the notifications table.
4. Click OK to save the settings.

70

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Scripts

Note that you cannot use scripts with scanners.


Under the Scripts item you will find premade scripts and user-defined scripts. Scripts can be used to
perform measurements automatically instead of performing manual calls or data transfers. Select the
Scripts item to open a list of scripts in the Configuration Manager view. Double-click on any of these
scripts to open the Script Editor dialog. In order to select a script file to be used in a measurement,
click the Device script settings button in the Devices view.
Creating Script files is described in more detail in chapter Making Script Files.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

71

Base Station Files

Under the Base Station Files item you will find loaded base station files. Select a BTS file to view the
BTS information in the Configuration Manager view. Click the button to remove the BTS file.

72

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Device Configurations

Under Device Configurations, you will find a list of device configuration files (.hwc). A device
configuration contains information on devices and their measurement configurations. You can use the
device configurations to quickly start measurements with Nemo Outdoor without having to detect and
configure the measurement devices each time you start Nemo Outdoor.
You can load a .hwc file by selecting File | Open Device Configuration. Alternatively, you can load a
device configuration when you start Nemo Outdoor by selecting it in the Load device Configuration
dialog. To make new device configurations, add devices manually in Nemo Outdoor and configure
them. When everything is ready, select File | Save Device Configuration As and type a name for the
saved file. The new .hwc file will appear in the Configuration Manager, Device Configurations folder.
To rename a device configuration, double-click the respective item in the Configuration Manager and
type a new name in the Rename HW Config dialog.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

73

Devices

Under the Devices item are listed all the devices that you have connected to Nemo Outdoor. Note that
you can add a new device from the plus icon , and remove a device by selecting the device and
clicking on the minus icon . The table on the right displays information about the selected device.
Each device (mobile, GPS, and scanner) has its own configuration dialog. Double-clicking on the
device will open the applicable device configuration dialog. These dialogs are presented next.

74

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Device Configuration for Mobiles and Modems

The Label field allows you to give a label such as a comment or a name for the phone, and makes it
easier to identify devices during measurement and post processing. The label can be seen in the
Nemo Outdoor user interface during a measurement and playback, and the information is also stored
in the log file header.
Trace port and Modem port selections are device-specific. Please refer to the Dial-up Networking
Setup Guide for more detailed information.
Kodiak PTT port defines the COM port for a Kodiak PTT device. Please refer to chapter Kodiak Pushto-Talk for more information.
Nemo Media Router option is used to enable Nemo Media Router. Select Automatic to enable the
option.
Circuit switched dial-up connection option gives a list of all the dial-up connections that have been
configured on your computer. If you are making CS data measurements, select a dial-up connection
here. See the Dial-Up Networking Setup guide provided by Anite Finland for detailed instructions for
configuring dial-up connections.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

75

Packet switched dial-up connection option gives a list of all the dial-up connections that have been
configured on your computer. If you are making PS data measurements, select a dial-up connection
here. See the Dial-Up Networking Setup guide provided by Anite Finland for detailed instructions for
configuring dial-up connections.
Antenna gain and Cable loss are antenna-related parameters and they are used in the conversion
from dBm to dBuV/m. This parameter is needed only if you are using external antennas. If you are
using the internal antenna of each phone, leave these values blank.
Antenna

Frequency

Antenna

type

range

gain (dBd)

1140.27

824
894/1710
1880/

0 dBd

Impedance

VSWR 1

Max

Polarization

Cable

Cable &

loss

connector

Linear

-0.55/ -

Mini Low

vertical

0.82

Loss 2.5 m,

dB/m

SMA male

power
50 ohm

2:1 @

10 W

specified
freq.

18502170
MHz
1140.26

890
960/1850
1990/
17102170

0 dBd

50 ohm

2:1 @
specified

10 W

Linear

Mini Low

vertical

Loss 2.5 m,

freq.

SMA male

MHz

The above examples can only be used with antennas received from Anite Finland Ltd. or Smarteq. If
you are using antennas from other antenna manufacturers, you will have to ask the antenna gain and
cable loss information from the manufacturer.

Voice quality algorithm defines which voice quality algorithms are used in voice quality
measurements.

76

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

If you select the Invex isolation module option, you can also make echo measurements. Select the
Enable echo measurement option to start logging the echo-related parameters. With the Advanced
echo OEM library provided by Opticom it is possible to measure echo from audio with both PESQ and
POLQA algorithms. Echo measurements require an additional license and it is available with Nemo
Invex using a handset isolation module. Echo measurements are not supported with commercial
sound cards, such as, Terratec DMX6 Fire or Maya44.
Select the Nemo audio module option to use the Nemo audio module for voice quality
measurements. You can define the port where the Nemo voice quality unit is connected in the dropdown menu.
Select the Sound card channel option to use the USB sound card for voice quality measurements.
Select the applicable sound card channel in the drop-down menu.
Select the Invex isolation module option to use a terminal with an Invex isolation module for voice
quality measurements.
Select the VoIP only option to make voice quality measurements (POLQA) over a VoIP connection. If
you select this option make the appropriate settings in the VoIP Call Configuration dialog (see VoIP
Calls).
Select Disabled when you do not wish to carry out voice quality measurements.
Video quality algorithm defines which algorithms are used in video streaming quality measurements.
For more information, see chapter Streaming Video Quality Testing.
After you have configured the device, click the Apply button to check that the device is working
properly. To exit the dialog, click OK.
Clicking on the Measurement Properties button will lead to the Measurement Properties dialog
where you can make device-specific measurement settings. You can also enter the Measurement
Properties dialog through Measurement | <device name> | Measurement Properties in the menu
bar.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

77

Device Configuration for Scanners

In the Label field you can define a suitable label for the device, for example, a name or a usage
purpose, making it easier to identify the device during measurement and post processing. The label
can be seen in the Nemo Outdoor user interface during a measurement and playback, and the
information is also stored in the log file header.
Port refers to the port to which the scanner is connected.
Baud rate refers to the communication speed.
Antenna gain and Cable loss are antenna-related parameters and they are used in the conversion
from dBm to dBuV/m. This parameter is needed only if you are using external antennas. If you are
using the internal antenna of each phone, leave these values blank.
Antenna

Frequency

Antenna

type

range

gain (dBd)

1140.27

824
894/1710
1880/

0 dBd

Impedance

VSWR 1

Max

Polarization

Cable

Cable &

loss

connector

Linear

-0.55/ -

Mini Low

vertical

0.82

Loss 2.5 m,

dB/m

SMA male

power
50 ohm

2:1 @

10 W

specified
freq.

18502170
MHz
1140.26

890
960/1850
1990/
17102170

0 dBd

50 ohm

2:1 @
specified
freq.

10 W

Linear

Mini Low

vertical

Loss 2.5 m,
SMA male

MHz

The above examples can only be used with antennas received from Anite Finland Ltd. or Smarteq. If
you are using antennas from other antenna manufacturers, you will have to ask the antenna gain and
cable loss information from the manufacturer.
Clicking on the Measurement Properties button will lead to the Measurement Properties dialog
where you can make device-specific measurement settings (see Measurement Properties).

78

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

After you have configured the device, click the Apply button to check that the device is working
properly. To exit the dialog, click OK.

Device Configuration for GPS Receivers

In the Label field you can define a label for the GPS device, for example, a name or a usage purpose,
making it easier to identify devices during measurement and post processing. The label can be seen
in the Nemo Outdoor user interface during a measurement and playback, and the information is also
stored in the log file header.
Serial port refers to the port to which the GPS receiver is connected.
Baud rate refers to the communication speed. The available values are 1200, 2400, 4800, and 9600.
Data bits, Parity and Stop bits are other communication-related parameters. The available values for
Data bits are 5, 6, 7, and 8, the options for Parity are Even, None, and Odd. The default value for Stop
bits is 1. You should set these values the same as in your GPS. Check your GPS receiver
documentation.
After you have configured the device, click the Apply button to check that the device is working
properly. To exit the dialog, click OK.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

79

View Groups

Under the View Groups item are listed all the view groups that are currently loaded. View groups are
sets of windows that are open at the same time. You can add a new view group from the plus icon ,
and remove a view group by selecting the item and clicking on the minus icon . When you select a
view group in the Configuration Manager, the right-hand panel displays the views that are saved in the
view group. You can define properties for each view by double-clicking the view name.
See chapter View Groups for more information on using the view groups.

80

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

MEASUREMENT PROPERTIES
The Measurement Properties dialog contains several pages and the contents depend on the device
type (mobile or scanner), on the device model, and on the technologies supported by the device.

Measurement Properties General

Network name field can be used for stating the friendly name for the network (operator) that Nemo
Outdoor measures with the respective test mobile. Note that you should enter the name yourself, as
Nemo Outdoor does not recognize the network that each mobile is using. The network name is
presented in the output files and helps you to recognize which network you have been monitoring.
BTS file defines the base station file that will be displayed on the map. If you have a GPS receiver
connected to the system, you can view the measurement vehicle on the map and a line will be drawn
from the measurement vehicle to the active base station. Click the button to browse for a BTS file
(.nbf or .csv).
Cell whitelist file is a feature needed in emergency call testing. It specifies a list of cells from which
emergency call testing is possible.
Subscriber number can be entered manually in case the information cannot be read from the device
with AT-commands.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

81

Measurement Properties Measurement


On the Measurement Properties Measurement page you can define various measurement-related
settings. For example, you can define what services will be tested, which data protocols are used, and
whether layer messages are logged or not. Note that the selection is device-specific.

Services
Voice Call opens the Voice Call Properties dialog.
DTMF characters field can be used to send DTMF (dual-tone multi-frequency) tones during a voice
call.
Short Messaging Service button opens the SMS Testing dialog. See chapter SMS Testing for more
information on SMS testing.
USSD Message button opens the USSD Testing dialog. See chapter USSD Testing for more
information on USSD testing.
Multimedia Messaging Service button opens the Packet Session Settings, MMS dialog. See chapter
MMS Testing for more information on MMS testing.
Circuit-Switched Data Call opens the Data Call Properties dialog.
Video Call button opens the Video Call Properties dialog. See chapter Making Video Calls for more
information.
Packet Session opens the Packet Session Settings dialog.
Supported Data Protocols opens a list of available data protocols. Clicking the field of a data
protocol will open a dialog for configuring the selected data protocol.
SIP Server option opens the SIP server dialog. See chapter VoIP Calls for more information.

82

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

VoIP Call option opens the VoIP call dialog. See chapter VoIP Calls for more information.
Facebook option opens the Facebook Configuration dialog. See chapter Facebook Testing for more
information.
Custom AT Commands offers the possibility to run custom AT commands with certain test terminals.
The available commands are device-specific. Type in the AT command and click Send Command.
The AT commands and responses are saved in the measurement file.

Measurement Options
Under Measurement Options you can enable and disable various measurement options such as layer
messages. If you disable some of the options, the disabled messages will not be recorded in the
measurement file. This will decrease output file size. The selection depends on the measurement
device used. The parameters in the Measurement Options list vary depending on the device. These
options are also accessible through the Devices view.

When the EVRC MOS compensation option is enabled, the Evaluation of Speech Quality (PESQ)
tool is biased against the Enhanced Variable Rate Codec (EVRC) used in CDMA networks and other
codecs in this family (EVRC-B and EVRC-WB). MOS value is incremented by 0.318MOS.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

83

Incoming call mode defines how incoming calls are handled. The options are answer, reject, and
ignore. You can also define a delay (in seconds) when the Answer option is selected.
With Qualcomm-based terminals there are several different Voice call methods. Voice call method is
device specific. Trace interface 2 method should be used with MultiRAB testing. When a voice call is
terminated, the PS data connection might be released with UEs using the Trace interface call method
to make voice calls. In such a case, it is recommended to use the Trace interface 2 call method.
Please check the Dial-up Networking Setup Guide or release note for device-specific information.
With Qualcomm-based terminals there is a number of different Video call methods and the correct
method must be selected to be able to make video call testing.
With the Select AMR codecs option, you can force a device to use a certain AMR codec mode. For
example, when a UE is forced to the WCDMA AMR WB codec, it can freely use any WB AMR codec
from 6.6 kbps to 23.85 kbps.

Note that the Enable RLC Data messages item should not be enabled with data connections
384kbit/s or higher as this may cause instability in the measurement terminal.

To view data in Packet decoder grids during playback, you need to enable the packet decoding
function prior to performing data measurements. Select Full or Partial in the Enable IP Capture
field. A separate .pcap-file will be generated for the measurement. This file needs to accompany
the measurement file in the same folder when viewing and decoding packet capture information
in Packet Decoder grids in Nemo Outdoor.

Measurement Settings
With the Force detach when entering idle mode option selected, a GPRS detach is forced when the
measurement device enters idle mode.
Enable diagnostic data logging option enables/disables Qualcomm raw packet logging. When
diagnostics data logging is enabled, you can select individual Qualcomm trace messages to be stored
in a separate binary file (.NBL). Both NBL and NMF files can be opened and played back with Nemo
Outdoor and Qualcomm raw data messages can be fully decoced in the grid view for further analysis.
This functionality requires the Diagnostics Data Logging option OD0700-00.

Due to a high sample rate, the diagnostic data logging option should not be activated during a
normal drive test.

84

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Currently, the following diagnostic messages are available:

DCI Information report

DL Transport block

LL1 PUSCH Tx Report

LTE MAC UL Transport block

MAC UL transport block

MAC UL Tx stat

PDCP UL stat

PUCCH TX report

RLC DL ALL PDU

LTE ML1 random access request (MSG1) report

LTE ML1 random access response (MSG2) report

LTE ML1 UE identification message (MSG3) report

LTE ML1 contention resolution message (MSG4) report

LTE RLC DL AM All PDU

LTE RLC UL AM All PDU

LTE ML1 PDCCH-PHICH indication report

LTE ML1 uplink packet build indication

LTE ML1 PDSCH stat indication

LTE LL1 PUCCH CSF Log

LTE LL1 PUSCH CSF log

LTE LL1 PDSCH decoding results

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

85

Measurement Properties Frequency Scanning with Mobiles

Note that this page is only visible in a phone's Measurement Properties dialog if the terminal
supports frequency scanning.

Enable frequency scanning option must be selected to activate frequency scanning for the mobile.
The Top-N scanning functionality can be used for scanning the strongest channels in GSM. With TopN scanning it is possible to get Top-N channel results for each band, e.g. for EGSM, GSM900 and
GSM1800. The benefits also include the possibility to benchmark different operators.
Selecting the BSIC decoding option displays BSIC value in a measurement window. BSIC threshold
defines the minimum BSIC level that the scanner reports.
When the Missing neighbor detection option is selected, the missing neighbor information event
(NMISS) is written in the log file. You can view the missing neighbor information, for example, in a grid
view.

86

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

If you select BSIC decoding or Missing neighbor detection, click the Select Channels button to
define the channels to be scanned.

Select the Show channels as frequencies option to view the channels in MHz.
In the Band drop-down menu you can select a band from which to view channels from in the
Available view. If you select All in the Band drop-down menu, channels from all bands will be viewed.
You can also select one band at a time and add the bands you want to scan.
The Available view provides a list of channels that are available for scanning. To add channels to the
Selected list, click on a number in the Available list and then click the Add button or simply doubleclick a channel to add it to the Selected list. To select all available channels for scanning, click the
Add All button. An alternative method to select channels is to type the channel numbers in the field at
the bottom of the dialog and to click Add. If all bands are selected, you have the possibility to select
Remove All | ... items from every band. Alternatively, if only one band is selected you can remove
only items from the current band through Remove All | ...items from current band.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

87

If you select the Top-N option, click the Top-N Configuration button to select channels.

In the Top-N Configuration dialog you can set the Start and Stop ARFCN range between which the
Top-N channels are recorded. Define the number of strongest channels to be searched in the Top-N
field. The maximum number of Top-N channels is 32. You can click on the Clear all button to clear the
table.

88

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Measurement Properties Pilot Scanning with Mobiles

Note that this page is only visible in a phone's Measurement Properties dialog if the terminal
supports pilot scanning.

The Enable pilot scanning option must be selected to activate pilot scanning for the mobile.
Select a value for the CPICH RSCP threshold field. The device will only report cells with CPICH
RSCP above the set value.
The Top-N scanning functionality can be used for scanning the strongest pilots in UMTS. With Top-N
scanning it is possible to get Top-N channel results for each band. The benefits also include the
possibility to benchmark different operators.
When the Missing neighbor detection option is selected, the missing neighbor information event
(NMISS) is written in the log file. You can view the missing neighbor information, for example, in a grid
view.
Click the Top-N Configuration button to enter the Select Channels dialog.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

89

Measurement Properties Frequency, Pilot, and Spectrum


Scanning with Scanners
Please refer to the separate scanner guides, Nemo FSR1 User Manual and Nemo Scanner Guide,
included in the product package.

Measurement Properties - Script


In order to select a script file to be used in a measurement, click the Device Settings button
Devices window and select Script Properties.

in the

In the Script File field, browse the script file that you want to use. There are some premade script files
available but you can also create your own in the Script Editor (see chapter Making Script Files).
With Nemo Outdoor you can define multiple script synchronization groups. The scripts in the same
group are synchronized with each other. Devices can be assigned for certain script groups. By default
the script group is selected as <None>, but the user can also create new script groups by selecting
<New group> in the Script group drop-down menu, and typing the name of the new script group in
the field. A script group can be also saved with a specific name. To be able to use script groups, the
Synchronize script repeats option must be selected in the User Interface Properties (see User
Interface Properties Measurement).
When a script group is selected as <None>, but Synchronize script repeats option is selected, all
script files that belong to the same <None> group are synchronized.

90

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Script groups can be used, e.g., with Nemo Outdoor multi configuration including two voice quality
terminals and two USB modems performing PS data transfers simultaneously. For example, script files
used with voice quality terminals belong to the same script group, and their script files are
synchronized with one another, whereas the PS data scripts belong to the second script group. The
script synchronization settings need to be configured separately for each device.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

91

DURING MEASUREMENTS
When Nemo Outdoor is performing the user defined test measurement, you can view the process in a
number of graphs, grids, and maps. The graph and grid windows are fully user configurable. In the
following chapters, the most common tasks are presented in more detail and some examples are
given to illustrate their use. If you have any problems in starting the measurements, see chapter
Troubleshooting.

TEXTUAL NOTES
It is possible to add textual notes at points of interest during measurements. Click the Add Textual
Note button in the toolbar. Note that you need to start recording before the button is activated.

You can either type the note in the field or select a predefined text and click OK. To save new
predefined notes, type in the text, click the arrow next to the OK button and select Add predefined
text. Next time the text will be available in the drop-down menu at the top.
The textual notes can be viewed during playback, for example, in an events grid.

92

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

NEMO COMMANDER REMOTE CONTROL OPTION


FOR NEMO OUTDOOR/ INVEX
Nemo Outdoor measurement units can be remotely configured and controlled with Nemo Commander.
This requires the Remote option in Nemo Outdoor/Nemo Invex and the Nemo Commander SW. All the
same user interface functionalities are available in remote mode as in normal mode. For more
information on the Nemo Commander SW, please refer to the Nemo Commander user manual.
To configure the Remote mode, select Remote | Settings.

Note that if the Remote menu does not appear in the menu bar, your Nemo Outdoor license
does not have the Remote option (product code OD0700-01).

On the User Interface Properties Remote page, select Yes for Enable remote mode. When
Remote mode is enabled, Nemo Outdoor will automatically perform a maintenance session at startup.
Also the manual Maintenance tool is activated in the Remote menu.
Define the Driver name and Driver phone number (optional).

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

93

Nemo Commander Server Options


FTP protocol is used to transfer data between field units and Nemo Commander. Commander Server
options define the server (FTP) address, username, and password.

Add the FTP server host name or IP address.

Leave Username, Remote folder, and Password fields empty. This information is generated by
the system and the fields are updated after the initial maintenance session.
Use secure protocol: Select in case SFTP protocols is used in the server
Use passive mode: With passive mode, the client always opens those new connections so the
firewall does not block the connection

Initial Field Unit Configuration


1. Build the Nemo Outdoor HW configuration, in other words, connect the measurement devices
(phones, USB modems, and scanners) to the Nemo Outdoor laptop.
2. A dedicated PS data connection (e.g. 3G/4G USB modem or smartphone, active only during
maintenance sessions) is required to establish the connection between Nemo Outdoor and Nemo
Commander. Connect the device to the Nemo Outdoor laptop and install the necessary drivers.
Do not add the device to Nemo Outdoor as it will not be used as a measurement device.
3. Synchronize date and time settings between the Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Commander
computers.
4. Enable the Remote mode on the Nemo Outdoor User Interface Properties Remote page and
define the Commander Server settings.
5. Select Maintenance from the Remote menu.

94

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

The Nemo Outdoor unit connects and registers to Nemo Commander.

The HW configuration of the Nemo Outdoor unit is uploaded to Nemo Commander.

Step 5, Maintenance, must be repeated every time the HW configuration changes.

Measurement Workflow
1. Nemo Commander: Define measurement sessions for the field unit(s)

Scripts for each device

Session start/stop time

2. Nemo Outdoor: Power on laptop and all test devices

Nemo Outdoor starts automatically

Status report is uploaded to Nemo Commander

Measurement session is downloaded from Nemo Commander

Measurements are started automatically according to the downloaded configuration

Periodic status reports are sent to Nemo Commander (configured in Nemo Commander)

3. Nemo Commander: Verify the HW configuration from latest status report (optional)

If incorrect, contact driver

4. Nemo Outdoor: End measurements

Measurements are stopped at the scheduled time

Log files and status reports are uploaded to Nemo Commander

Events Reported by Nemo Outdoor/Nemo Invex to Nemo


Commander
The following measurement events are reported by Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Invex to Nemo
Commander.
Status events:

Start measurement

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

Stop measurement

GSP fix lost

GSP fix acquired

Device responding

Device power off request

Device restart

High voltage shutdown

Battery operation

Battery shutdown

Errors:

Start measurement failed

Device not responding

Warnings:

Low voltage

High voltage

Battery voltage low

95

96

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

MAKING SCANNING MEASUREMENTS


With a Scanner
In order to measure with a scanner, just start the recording by clicking the Start Recording
Nemo Outdoor will start writing the measurement data in a file.

button.

With a Mobile
To carry out frequency scanning with a mobile phone, first make sure that the terminal model supports
the scanning feature.
To do frequency scanning, select Measurement control | Start Single Shot Scanning, or
Measurement control | Start Continuous Scanning.

To end a scanning measurement, select Measurement control | Stop Scanning.

MAKING VOICE CALLS


To make voice calls:
1. In the Measurement Properties, Measurement page (see Measurement Properties
Measurement), insert the phone number that you wish to use in the test call in the Voice Call field.
Click OK.
2. Select Start Voice Call from the Device Commands menu
or from the Measurement menu.
Alternatively, you can activate a script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts
button.

Note that after you have activated the script, you cannot control the measurement manually
until the script is finished or you interrupt the script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button.
3. When you wish to finish the call in manual mode, select Stop Voice Call from the Device
Commands menu . If you are running a script, wait until the script is finished.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

97

Voice Call Properties


Voice call properties are needed to establish the voice calls and to make voice quality measurements.
Click the Voice Call button in the Measurement Properties, Measurement dialog and the Voice Call
Properties dialog will be opened.

Number defines the number to be called. It must be a valid phone number. The number must be such
that the line stays open for a user-defined time and some speech or sound is transferred on the line.
The Number field can contain up to 17 characters.
Call duration determines the time that the call lasts in seconds.

Fixed: The duration timer is started from the channel assignment. The range of duration values
is from 1 to 1,000,000 seconds. Note that the maximum value of this parameter is the
same as the value you have set as the Delay Between Call Attempts parameter.

Random: In addition to a fixed call duration, you can specify a random call duration by
specifying the minimum and maximum values in seconds. The call duration will be randomly
selected between the specified values during measurements.

98

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Call attempt timeout value determines the maximum duration of the call attempt. If the call attempt
timeout value is exceeded before the cellular system has assigned a traffic channel, the call attempt
will be stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure. The range of the Call Attempt Timeout
values is from 5 to 60 seconds. The value is recommended to be at least 10 seconds.
When Request voice call callback is selected, the application sends callback command to Nemo
Server using DTMF tones. DTMF tones are sent separately from audio so naturally DTMF tones do
not affect to MOS score. If Nemo server is connected to analog telephone lines (PSTN) user must
define the correct callback number on the server side using Nemo Server manager application. If
ISDN lines are used with Nemo Server and test terminals are selected to be sent also caller id to
Nemo server, callback number is recognized automatically. Note that this functionality requires Nemo
Server version 2.5.0 or later.
When Wait for call connection option is selected, a call script will move on to the next command
after receiving the CAA event after a voice call has been made. When the option is not selected, the
script will move on to the next command after a traffic channel is allocated (CAC1 event is received).
Select the Enable end-to-end call option to activate voice call synchronization between two devices
connected to the same Nemo Outdoor system or between a device and Nemo Server.
Select the Nemo Server option to enable voice call synchronization between a device and Nemo
Server. Nemo Server Settings button opens the HTTPS Options dialog where you can define
connection settings.
Select the Local device options to activate end-to-end voice calls between two devices connected to
the same Nemo Outdoor system.
Own number defines the A-party phone number.
Call reception timeout defines the max. time to receive the incoming call. If call is not received within
the timeout, call attempt failure with the cause Incoming call not received is written to the log file.
Select the Enable voice quality option to activate the voice quality settings. Note that the voice
quality settings are available only if your license supports voice quality measurements.
Reference sample filename defines the reference sample to which the received audio sample is
compared. If you want to use your own test samples, make sure that the samples are of 8KHz
sampling rate, 16-bit linear coded .wav files that are no longer than six seconds in length. With the
Terratec sound card, sampling rate can be 8kHz or 16 kHz (for WB-AMR testing) and sample length a
maximum of 30 seconds. For ECHO measurements, use one of the following samples: 10s.wav,
4s_m.wav, 8s.wav, ru_6s.wav, and ru_6s_wb.wav.
Select the Save sample files option to save the received voice quality sample files.
Prefix for received sample files refers to the prefix that is added to the file names of received audio
sample files. If you leave this field empty, the received audio files are not stored. When a prefix is
defined, Nemo Outdoor names the files as follows: prefix_mos_date_time.wav where prefix is the
user-defined prefix, mos the voice quality score on a MOS scale with one decimal precision but
without decimal point, date in DDMMYYYY format, and time in HHMMSS format. For example:
terminal1_34_15112004_143045.wav.
Save only samples below threshold determines the value below which the samples are saved. The
threshold values range from 0-5, 0 being the worst and 5 the best value. The default threshold value is
5, which means that all samples are saved.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

99

Note that the Script Settings table is activated only if you access this dialog through the Script
Editor. See chapter Making Script Files for more information on making scripts.

Note that with voice quality measurements when calling the Nemo audio server, the delay time
between a new call attempt and the previous call disconnect must be at least 10 seconds.
CDMA specific settings, Service option defines the service option used for the test call. Note that
the CDMA specific setting is activated only if you are measuring with a CDMA mobile.

Configuring Manual End-to-End Voice Calls


With Nemo Outdoor it is possible to make end-to-end voice call testing between two devices
connected to the same Nemo Outdoor system.
1. Add two phones to Nemo Outdoor: Device A and Device B
2. Open the Voice Call Properties for Device A by double-clicking the Voice Call item in the Devices
view.

3. Enter Device B phone number in the Number field.

4. Select the Enable end-to-end call option.


5. Select the Local device option and select Device B from the list. Click OK.
6. You can now start making voice calls from Device A to Device B.

1 00

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

HTTPS Options
In the HTTPS Options dialog you can define the connection settings for the Nemo Server.

Define the server address, autouser (username), and password and the name of the Remote
folder, i.e. folder in which the measurement files are sent on the server.
Select the Use secure protocol option to send the measurement files using HTTPS protocol.
Select the Use passive mode option to send the measurement files using passive mode.
When the Move local files to Sent folder after upload option is selected, the measurement files
are moved to the Sent folder in the C:\Nemo Tools directory on your computer after the transfer. You
can also change this default destination in User Interface Properties | Paths | Measurements.
The file transfer can be performed using a default Internet connection, via a user-selected dial-up
connection, or using mobile broadband.
When you select the Use a Proxy Server option, the Proxy address, Username and Password
fields will become active.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 01

Voice Call Properties TETRA

Note that the TETRA tab is visible only if you are measuring with a TETRA mobile.
Voice call properties are needed to establish the voice calls. Click the Voice Number Properties
button in the Measurement Properties dialog and the Voice Call Properties dialog will be opened.

Number defines the number to be called. It must be a valid phone number. The number must be such
that the line stays open for a user-defined time and some speech or sound is transferred on the line.
The Number field can contain up to 17 characters.
Call type defines what kind of calls will be made. There are five different options in TETRA networks:
duplex, semiduplex, group, direct, and PSTN.

Duplex: Normal call between two terminals; both parties can speak at the same time

Semiduplex: Call between two terminals, but only one party can speak at a time by pressing the
PTT (Press-to-Talk) button

Group: Call from one terminal to a group; all terminals having that group active can listen, and by
pressing the PTT button, also speak

Direct: Call between terminals which bypasses the network, by means of the PTT button

1 02

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

PSTN: Call from terminal to fixed line or to another cellular mobile

Note that the Script Settings table is activated only if you access this dialog through the Script
Editor. See chapter Making Script Files for more information on making scripts.
Call duration determines the time that the call lasts in seconds. The duration timer is started from the
channel assignment. The range of duration values is from 1 to 1,000,000 seconds. Note that the
maximum value of this parameter is the same as the value you have set as the Delay Between
Call Attempts parameter.
Call attempt timeout value determines the maximum duration of the call attempt. If the call attempt
timeout value is exceeded before the cellular system has assigned a traffic channel, the call attempt
will be stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure. The range of the Call Attempt Timeout
values is from 5 to 60 seconds. The value is recommended to be at least 10 seconds.

Push-to-Talk (PTT) Testing


Nemo Outdoor supports QChat (developed by Qualcomm) and Kodiak Push-to-Talk (PTT)
technologies. QChat Push-to-Talk (PTT) calls must be performed using the keypad of the phone when
used with Nemo Outdoor. Kodiak PTT calls can be made using UI commands in Nemo Outdoor.
Normal call events and statistics are written when attempting or ending PTT calls. Different states of
PTT calls, such as idle, getting ready to receive, receiving, transmitting are written to VCHI event.
Please see the file format specification for further information. RTP packets are recorded and decoded
with Nemo Outdoor. Qchat and Kodiak PTT are optional features in Nemo Outdoor and require a
license option.

Kodiak Push-to-Talk
Kodiak PTT devices are connected with Nemo Outdoor as Bluetooth devices. After the device has
been paired with the laptop, check the COM port number from the Windows Bluetooth Devices dialog.
Start Nemo Outdoor and add the device (Add New Device | Phone | Qualcomm). In the Device
Configuration dialog, select the COM port assigned for your device in the Kodiak PTT port field and
click OK.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 03

In the Measurement Properties Measurement page, double-click the Kodiak PTT call item to open
the Kodiak Call Configuration dialog.

Call type defines what kind of call will be made. The options are one to one, one to many, and group
call.
Recipients defines to whom the call is made. The recipients are selected from the contact list of the
Kodiak application and are defined as index numbers. For example, if you would like to make a call to
the first contact on the contact list, enter 0. If the selected call type is one to many, define several
recipients and separate the index numbers with semicolons. If the selected call type is group call,
select the recipient from the group contact list of the Kodiak application and again, use the index
number.
After the call type and recipients have been defined, select Register Kodiak Server to login to the
Kodiak server.

After you have registered to the Kodiak server you can start a Kodiak call.

1 04

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Once the Kodiak call has been established, select Press PTT Button/Release PTT Button.

From Events grids, you can observe the Kodiak call events.

In addition to calls, you can send IPAs. Go to Measurement Properties Measurement and doubleclick the Instant Personal Alert item. Define the recipient (only one at a time) and click Send
Message.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 05

VOICE QUALITY MEASUREMENTS


Nemo Outdoor supports mobile-to-mobile and mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile voice quality measurements.
Please refer to the Nemo Voice Quality Guide document for complete instructions on setting up and
making voice quality measurements.

MAKING VIDEO CALLS


Click the Video Call button in the Measurement Properties, Measurement dialog to access the
Video Call Properties dialog. These settings are needed for making video calls.

Number defines the number where the video call will be made.
When Request voice call callback is selected, the application sends callback command to Nemo
Server using DTMF tones. DTMF tones are sent separately from audio so naturally DTMF tones do
not affect to MOS score. If Nemo server is connected to analog telephone lines (PSTN) user must
define the correct callback number on the server side using Nemo Server manager application. If
ISDN lines are used with Nemo Server and test terminals are selected to be sent also caller id to
Nemo server, callback number is recognized automatically. Note that this functionality requires Nemo
Server version 2.5.0 or later.
Select the Voice quality option to activate the voice quality settings. Note that the voice quality
settings are available only if your license supports voice quality measurements.

1 06

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Reference sample filename defines the reference sample to which the received audio sample is
compared. If you want to use your own test samples, make sure that the samples are of 8KHz
sampling rate, 16-bit linear coded .wav files that are no longer than ten seconds in length. With the
Terratec sound card, sampling rate can be 8kHz or 16 kHz (for WB-AMR testing) and sample length a
maximum of 30 seconds.
Select the Save sample files option to save the received voice quality sample files.
Prefix for received sample files refers to the prefix that is added to the file names of received audio
sample files. If you leave this field empty, the received audio files are not stored. When a prefix is
defined, Nemo Outdoor names the files as follows: prefix_mos_date_time.wav where prefix is the
user-defined prefix, mos the voice quality score on a MOS scale with one decimal precision but
without decimal point, date in DDMMYYYY format, and time in HHMMSS format. For example:
terminal1_34_15112004_143045.wav.
Save only samples below threshold determines the value below which the samples are saved. The
threshold values range from 0-5, 0 being the worst and 5 the best value. The default threshold value is
5, which means that all samples are saved.

Note that the Script Settings view is activated only if you access this dialog through the Script
Editor. See chapter Making Script Files for more information on making scripts.

Note that with voice quality measurements when calling Nemo Server, the delay time between a
new call attempt and the previous call disconnect must be at least 10 seconds.
CDMA specific settings, Service option defines the service option used for the test call. Note that
the CDMA specific setting is activated only if you are measuring with a CDMA mobile.
Call duration determines the time that the call lasts in seconds. The duration timer is started from the
channel assignment. The range of duration values is from 1 to 1,000,000 seconds. Note that the
maximum value of this parameter is the same as the value you have set as the Delay Between
Call Attempts parameter.
Call attempt timeout value determines the maximum duration of the call attempt. If the call attempt
timeout value is exceeded before the cellular system has assigned a traffic channel, the call attempt
will be stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure. The range of the Call Attempt Timeout
values is from 5 to 60 seconds. The value is recommended to be at least 10 seconds.

Note that video calls with the generic Qualcomm handler require some further settings to be
made prior to making the call. Go to Measurement Properties | Measurement, and select the
applicable video call method for the measurement from the drop-down menu.
Select the method based on the list below, or try each Method separately and select the one that
works. The selected method is saved to the device configuration file.
Method 1 - Samsung Z105
Method 2 - Samsung Z107
Method 3 - Samsung Z140, Samsung Z500, Samsung P920, Samsung Z560, Samsung ZX20
Method 4 - Samsung ZV10
Method 5 - Qualcomm TM 6250 reference mobile
Method 6 - Qualcomm TM 6250 reference mobile

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 07

Method 7 - LG KU950 , LG KF700


Method 8 - Samsung U800 (always required to first make a video call using the terminal keypad)
Method 9 - Samsung G800
Method 10 - Not used

To make video calls:


1. In the Measurement Properties, Configuration dialog, insert the phone number that you wish to
use in the test call in the Video Number field. Click OK.
2. Select Make Video Call from the Device Commands menu
or from the Measurement menu.
Alternatively, you can activate a script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts
button.

Note that after you have activated the script, you cannot control the measurement manually
until the script is finished or you interrupt the script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button.
3. When you wish to finish the call in manual mode, select Stop Video Call. If you are running a
script, wait until the script is finished.

Note! Video call testing is supported on any video call capable terminal based on Qualcomm
chipset. However, the user must remember to select the correct method from Measurement
Properties | Measurement prior to making the call. The selected method is saved to the device
configuration file.

Terminals verified by Anite Finland support video calls. However, video call testing with
Android-based devices is not supported.

1 08

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

DATA TRANSFERS
With mobiles supporting CS and PS data, you can make data transfers. In Nemo Outdoor, you have
several data protocol options for making data transfers.
The Nemo Outdoor Multi system enables multiple simultaneous data connections. Each data transfer
needs to be set up and configured individually.
Multiple concurrent data transfers can be made manually or with scripts. To make multiple concurrent
data transfers manually, go in online mode and activate a packet session. Then select Start New Data
Transfer and the desired protocol.

To view data in Packet decoder grids during playback, you need to enable the packet decoding
function (Measurement Properties - Measurement) prior to performing data measurements.
Select Full or Partial in the Enable IP Capture field. A separate .pcap-file will be generated for
the measurement, and this file needs to accompany the measurement file under the same folder
when viewing and decoding packet capture information in Packet Decoder grids in Nemo
Outdoor.

Configuring the Data Connection

Before you can start making data transfers you need to define the actual connection that is
used for the transfer. The setup is different for CS and PS data transfers.
If you are making CS data transfers, see chapter Data Call Properties. If you are making PS data
transfers, see chapter Packet Session Settings.

Data Call Properties


Data Call properties are needed to establish the circuit-switched data connection. Open the Data Call
Properties dialog by double-clicking the Circuit-Switched Data Call item in the Devices view.
There are separate views for GSM, UMTS, and CDMA. The parameters are the same. The UMTS and
CDMA views just have fewer parameters.

A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the dial-up
server (number, username, and password) are operator-specific.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 09

Number defines the number to be called of the dial-up server.


Username refers to the dial-up server username.
Password refers to the dial-up server password.
Transparent mode defines whether transparent or non-transparent mode is used in the CS data call.
Compression defines if no compression or v.42bis compression is used.
Modem type refers to the modem type that the dial-up server is using. The alternatives are Analog
(v.34) and ISDN (v.110 and v.120).
Timeslots (UL/DL) defines the number of timeslots for each direction.
Coding defines the coding scheme used in the air interface.
Enable automatic link adaptation option allows you to disable and enable Automatic Link Adaptation
(ALA). The ALA technology controls power levels and automatically selects the best channel coding.

1 10

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Packet Session Settings


Packet session settings are needed to establish the packet switched data connection. Double-click the
Packet Session item in the Devices view to access the Packet Session Settings dialog.

All the parameters in this dialog are operator specific. You must select the correct parameters to make
the packet transfer function. Contact the operator of the network that you are measuring.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 11

TCP/UDP Protocol Configuration (Iperf)

Note that it is required that Nemo Server be used with Iperf testing as the original Iperf service
is slightly modified for optimal performance.
Open the TCP/UDP Protocol Configuration dialogs by double-clicking the TCP (IPerf) and UDP
(IPerf) items in the Devices view.

Host name is the IP address used in Nemo Server.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals, each
connection must have its own IP address.

Note that if you are doing multiple simultaneous data transfers on a single terminal, the same IP
address can be used.

Note that Firewall should be turned off.


Host port refers to the port used by Nemo Server. For TCP and UDP protocols, the default port is
5001.
Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection
to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time, connection attempt will
fail.
Listen port refers to the port used by the client. For TCP and UDP protocols, the default port is 6015.
Direction defines whether you are sending or receiving data, or both.

1 12

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Transfer timeout determines the maximum waiting time after data connection. If the transfer attempt
timeout value is exceeded before data connection, the data connection attempt will be stopped and
the attempt will be marked as a failure. The range of Transfer timeout values is from 0 to 60 seconds.
The value is recommended to be at least 10 seconds.
TCP window size defines the size of the receive window during TCP/IP transmission. If it is too small,
it can decrease the maximum data throughput, and if it is too high it can increase the retransmission
round-trip time (RTT). To be able to avoid decrease of data throughput, the window size should be at
least the maximum throughput multiplied by RTT. For example, with HSDPA with category 8 the
maximum throughput is about 7.3 Mbit/s and RTT is about 100 ms. To avoid reduction of the
throughput the TCP window size should be set at least to 7.3 Mbit/s * 0.1 s = 730 kbit = 91.25 kB.
Downlink testing (these values are indicative only):
Max. throughput

~RTT (ms)

TCP window size (kbit)

TCP window size (kB)

64 kbps (GPRS/ EDGE)

600

38.4

4.8

128 kbps (GPRS/ EDGE)

600

76.8

9.6

256 kbps (GPRS/ EDGE)

600

153.6

19.2

384kbps (Rel. 99)

200

76.8

9.6

HSDPA 1.8Mbps
UE category 3 & 4

100

180

22.5

HSDPA 3.6Mbps
UE category 5 & 6

100

360

45

HSDPA 7.3Mbps
UE category 7 & 8

100

730

91.25

HSDPA 10.2Mbps
UE category 9

100

1020

127.5

HSDPA 14.4Mbps
UE category 9

100

1440

180

TCP buffer size is the amount of data that can be buffered during a connection without a validation
from the receiver. It can be between 1 and 8291 kbytes.
UDP buffer size is the amount of data that can be buffered during a connection without a validation
from the receiver. It can be between 1 and 8291 kbytes.
UDP bandwidth defines how much data is attempted to be transmitted. Since UDP does not
guarantee successful data transmission, it is not limited by maximum throughput of the lower layers. If
higher data transmission rate is used, the packet error rate (PER) increases. For example, if lower
layers are capable of transmitting 100kbit/s and UDP bandwidth is configured to 400kbit/s, there
should be a 75% packet error rate (only every fourth packet has been able to transmit successfully).
Naturally UDP bandwidth should not be configured too small since it limits the maximum throughput
that is not normally desired.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 13

UDP datagram size defines the size of the UDP packet in bytes. It should be smaller than the
maximum packet size of the lower layers to be able to avoid packet fragmentation in the lower layers.
Packet fragmentation has a huge negative impact to the achieved data throughput and it should be
avoided. On the other hand if too small UDP packet size is used the portion of the UDP and IP header
increases which decreases the amount of transmitted user data with the result of smaller data
throughput. Normally good maximum value for UDP datagram is a little bit less than maximum
Ethernet packet size which is 1,500 bytes. A good default value for the UDP datagram size is 1,460
bytes.
Number of threads defines the number of parallel Iperf data transfers.
Transfer duration defines the length of the data transfer in seconds.
Transfer data size defines the length of the total data transfer in kilobytes; that is, the transfer finishes
when the defined amount of data has been transferred. The size of the individual data packages is
defined in the Packet Size field.

Note that if you have chosen Transfer data size from the Packet Transfer Properties dialog, the
Transfer duration option will be disabled. This is because when the Transfer data size option is
used, the transmission will end after a certain amount of data has been transferred. It is not
limited by time.
Next, click OK to return to the Measurement Properties dialog. Click the PDP Context Properties
button.

Configuring the FTP Protocol


Nemo Outdoor has an integrated FTP client, which can be used to measure data transfer rates
between Nemo Outdoor and the FTP server. The server can be any standard FTP server. Current
data throughput and transferred data size are reported during transfer. The FTP module supports
firewall-friendly passive mode transfers. Normally when a data transfer is initialized, the server opens
a new connection to the client and then data is transferred through this connection. Some firewalls
may be configured to refuse any incoming connection requests, and in that case the data transfer
would fail. With passive mode, the client always opens those new connections so the firewall does not
block the connection.

A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the dial-up
server (number, username, and password) are operator-specific.

If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the computer where
you are running Nemo Outdoor.

To set up data measurements using FTP


1. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and
to connect and configure the measurement devices.
2. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (see Measurement
Properties Measurement)
3. Configure the data connection for CS data (see Data Call Properties) or PS data (see Packet
Session Settings).
4. Define FTP transfer-related settings in the FTP Transfer Properties dialog.
5. Create a script (optional) (see Making Script Files).

1 14

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

6. After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer (see Making Data
Transfers).

FTP Transfer Properties


Open the FTP Transfer Properties dialog by double-clicking the FTP item in the Devices view.

Host name is the IP address of the FTP server used.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals, each
connection must have its own IP address.

Note that if you are doing multiple simultaneous data transfers on a single terminal, the same IP
address can be used.

If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the computer on
which you are running Nemo Outdoor.
Port refers to the port used by the FTP server.
In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the FTP server.
In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the FTP server.
Some firewalls may be configured to refuse any incoming connection requests, and in that case the
data transfer would fail. With passive mode, the client always opens those new connections so the
firewall does not block the connection. Select the Passive mode option to activate passive mode.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 15

Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection
to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time, connection attempt will
fail.
Proxy type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. Supported types are Tunneling,
SOCKS4, and SOCKS5.
Address refers to the address of the proxy.
Port refers to the port used by the proxy.
In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the proxy.
In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the proxy.
Direction defines whether you are sending or receiving data.
Buffer size defines the transmit/receive buffer used with the transfer protocol in kilobytes.
Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if
there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, transfer will
fail.
Transfer attempts defines how many times an interrupted data transfer is resumed during one FTP
session.
Number of threads defines in how many threads the test file is split during an FTP transfer. For
example, the size of the downloaded file is 10MB. The number of threads is set to five. Nemo Outdoor
splits the 10MB file into five fragments with the size of 2MB each. All five FTP transfer sessions are
started simultaneously. Each thread creates a new FTP session and transfers a fragment of the file.
Total application data throughput is recorded including all threads. Resume is not supported with multi
threaded FTP transfers. In case of a data drop, all threads will start from the beginning.
Remote file defines the name and location of the file that is on the FTP server. If you are receiving
data, this is the source file. If you are sending data, this is the destination file.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to send
for all of them, you must define a different remote file for each connection. Otherwise the
different data connections will try to write in the same file.

Also note that if there are several testing units using the same FTP server, we recommend that
you use a unique file name extension (e.g., filename_tester1.txt, filename_tester2.txt, etc.) for
each unit to avoid a situation where two testing units are trying to write in the same file.
Local file defines the name and location of the file that is on your laptop. If you are receiving data, this
is the output file. If you are sending data, this is the source file. The default location for these files is
defined in the User Interface Properties Paths dialog.
Generate local file allows you to generate random binary files with user-specified file size. This
functionality is available with FTP upload testing. The file is named with following format <IMEI>_<file
size in kB>.bin.
Select the Write local file to disk option to save the downloaded file on disk.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to receive
for all of them, you must define a different local file for each connection. Otherwise the different
data connections will try to write in the same file.

1 16

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Configuring the SFTP Protocol


Nemo Outdoor has an integrated SFTP client, which can be used to measure data transfer rates
between Nemo Outdoor and the SFTP server. The server can be any standard SFTP server. Current
data throughput and transferred data size are reported during transfer. The SFTP module supports
firewall-friendly passive mode transfers. Normally when a data transfer is initialized, the server opens
a new connection to the client and then data is transferred through this connection. Some firewalls
may be configured to refuse any incoming connection requests, and in that case the data transfer
would fail. With passive mode, the client always opens those new connections so the firewall does not
block the connection.

A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the dial-up
server (number, username, and password) are operator-specific.

If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the computer where
you are running Nemo Outdoor.

To set up data measurements using SFTP


1. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and
to connect and configure the measurement devices.
2. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (see Measurement
Properties Measurement)
3. Configure the data connection for CS data (see Data Call Properties) or PS data (see Packet
Session Settings).
4. Define SFTP transfer-related settings in the SFTP Transfer Properties dialog.
5. Create a script (optional) (see Making Script Files).
6. After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer (see Making Data
Transfers).

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 17

SFTP Transfer Properties


Open the SFTP Transfer Properties dialog by double-clicking the SFTP item in the Devices view.

Host name is the IP address of the SFTP server used.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals, each
connection must have its own IP address.

Note that if you are doing multiple simultaneous data transfers on a single terminal, the same IP
address can be used.

If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the computer on
which you are running Nemo Outdoor.
Port refers to the port used by the SFTP server.
In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the SFTP server.
In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the SFTP server.
Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection
to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time, connection attempt will
fail.
Proxy type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. Supported types are Tunneling,
SOCKS4, and SOCKS5.
Address refers to the address of the proxy.
Port refers to the port used by the proxy.

1 18

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the proxy.
In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the proxy.
Direction defines whether you are sending or receiving data.
Buffer size defines the transmit/receive buffer used with the transfer protocol in kilobytes.
Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if
there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, transfer will
fail.
Transfer attempts defines how many times an interrupted data transfer is resumed during one SFTP
session.
Remote file defines the name and location of the file that is on the SFTP server. If you are receiving
data, this is the source file. If you are sending data, this is the destination file.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to send
for all of them, you must define a different remote file for each connection. Otherwise the
different data connections will try to write in the same file.

Also note that if there are several testing units using the same SFTP server, we recommend that
you use a unique file name extension (e.g., filename_tester1.txt, filename_tester2.txt, etc.) for
each unit to avoid a situation where two testing units are trying to write in the same file.
Local file defines the name and location of the file that is on your laptop. If you are receiving data, this
is the output file. If you are sending data, this is the source file. The default location for these files is
defined in the User Interface Properties Paths dialog.
Generate local file allows you to generate random binary files with user-specified file size. This
functionality is available with SFTP upload testing. The file is named with following format <IMEI>_<file
size in kB>.bin.
Select the Write local file to disk option to save the downloaded file on disk.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to receive
for all of them, you must define a different local file for each connection. Otherwise the different
data connections will try to write in the same file.

Configuring the HTTP(S) Protocol


The HTTP(S) testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred through the
HTTP(S) protocol. The HTTP(S) protocol is used in web browsing. In HTTP(S) testing, the user
selects one file that will be downloaded or uploaded through the HTTP(S) protocol and this data
transfer is measured.

A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the dial-up
server (number, username, and password) are operator-specific.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 19

To set up data measurements using HTTP(S)


1. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and
to connect and configure the measurement devices.
2. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (see Measurement
Properties Measurement)
3. Configure the data connection for CS data (see Data Call Properties) or PS data (see Packet
Session Settings).
4. Define HTTP transfer-related settings in the HTTP(S) Transfer Properties dialog.
5. Create a script (optional) (see Making Script Files).
6. After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer (see Making Data
Transfers).

HTTP(S) Transfer Properties


Open the HTTP Transfer Properties dialog by double-clicking the HTTP item in the Devices view.
The same dialog is used for defining HTTPS transfer properties.

In the HTTP Transfer Properties dialog, you can define the required data transfer settings.
Proxy Type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. Supported types are Tunneling,
SOCKS4, and SOCKS5.
Address refers to the address of the proxy.
Port refers to the port used by the proxy.

1 20

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection
to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time, connection attempt will
fail.
In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the proxy.
In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the proxy.
Direction defines whether the HTTP file is sent or received.
Buffer size defines the transmit/receive buffer used with the transfer protocol in kilobytes.
Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if
there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, transfer will
fail.
Number of threads enables all the threads to be started simultaneously with the same time stamp.
The number of threads can be defined by the user. Each thread transfers the entire file.
URL defines the IP address of the test file that will be downloaded when data is received. For
example, http://www.yourcompany.com/testfile.htm. Only one file will be downloaded at a time. If you
are sending HTTP data, URL defines the destination. To define a port for the transfer, type the port
number after the URL, for example, http://www.yourcompany.com:85.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals, you must
define a different URL from different servers for each of them.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal, you can use
the same URL for all of them.

If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the computer where
you are running Nemo Outdoor.
To make consecutive transfers, create a script with several HTTP transfers. See chapter Making Script
Files for instructions on making scripts.
Local File defines the output file and location for HTTP testing. The default location for these files is
defined in the User Interface Properties Paths dialog.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to receive
for all of them, you must define a different local file for each connection. Otherwise the different
data connections will try to write in the same file.
Generate local file allows you to generate random binary files with user-specified file size. This
functionality is available with HTTP upload testing. The file is named with following format
<IMEI>_<file size in kB>.bin.
Select the Write local file to disk option to save the downloaded file on disk.
User agent allows you to define the user agent string used for the HTTP/HTTPS transfer. It is by
default Nemo Outdoor, but it is possible to define another user agent. Please see the http://useragents.my-addr.com/user_agent_request/user_agent_examples-and-user_agent_types.php for further
details about user agents.
Select the Use SSL encryption option to transfer the files over a HTTPS connection.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 21

Configuring the (HTTP) Browsing Protocol


The HTTP Browser testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred through the
HTTP Browsing protocol. The HTTP protocol is used in web browsing. In HTTP testing, the user
selects one URL address that will be downloaded through the HTTP protocol and this data transfer is
measured.

If you are experiencing problems with HTTP browsing testing, such as, the page downloading
time is increased, disable the following LAN settings: Automatically detect settings and Proxy
server.

To set up data measurements using HTTP browsing protocol


1. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and
to connect and configure the measurement devices.
2. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (see Measurement
Properties Measurement)
3. Configure the data connection for CS data (see Data Call Properties) or PS data (see Packet
Session Settings).
4. Define HTTP browsing-related settings in the Browser Transfer Properties dialog.
5. Create a script (optional) (see Making Script Files).
6. After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer (see Making Data
Transfers).

1 22

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Browser Transfer Properties


Open the Browser Transfer Properties dialog by double-clicking the Browsing item in the Devices
view.

URL defines the IP address of the test page that will be downloaded. For example,
http://www.yourcompany.com/testbrowser.htm.
Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if
there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, the transfer
will fail.
If Decode content information is selected, information about the images, texts and links are written
to measurement file including the number of content elements and size information.
In the Additional headers field you can type a custom HTTP header, for example, for identifying the
user agent.
The downloaded page can be seen during the measurement and the total time to download the whole
page is written to the measurement file. The cache is disabled by default. PPP and RLC layer data
throughputs are logged during the browser testing. The average PPP and RLC data throughputs are
also available. Average results are calculated from the time PDP context was active (PAC- PAD). The
connection setup time and the download time can be seen in Nemo Outdoor or calculated with Nemo
Analyze

For multi browser testing with single computer it is recommended that Nemo Server be used for
multiple simultaneous data connections, e.g. for benchmarking purposes as each connection
must have its own IP address.

If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the computer where
you are running Nemo Outdoor.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 23

Configuring the POP3 Protocol


POP3, SMTP, and IMAP testing offers the possibility to send emails through Nemo Outdoor and to
monitor how the message is transferred. POP3 and IMAP protocols are used for receiving and SMTP
protocol for sending emails.

A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the dial-up
server (number, username, and password) are operator-specific.

To set up data measurements using POP3


1. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and
to connect and configure the measurement devices.
2. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (see Measurement
Properties Measurement)
3. Configure the data connection for CS data (see Data Call Properties) or PS data (see Packet
Session Settings).
4. Define POP3 Server settings in the E-Mail Settings POP3 dialog. Also define the test e-mails
that are used in the measurement.
5. Create a script (optional) (see Making Script Files).
6. After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer (see Making Data
Transfers).

E-Mail Settings POP3


Open the E-Mail Settings (POP3) dialog by double-clicking the POP3 item in the Devices view.

POP3 Server Settings define settings for the POP3 server used in the measurements.

1 24

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Server name defines a name or an IP address for the POP3 server.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals, each
connection must have its own IP address.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal, the same IP
address can be used.
Port refers to the port used by the POP3 server.
In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the POP3 server.
In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the POP3 server.
Select the Use SSL encryption option to apply SSL encryption to the test email.
Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection
to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time, connection attempt will
fail.
Proxy server settings define settings for the proxy server used in the measurements.
Proxy type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. Supported types are Tunneling,
SOCKS4, and SOCKS5.
Address refers to the address of the proxy.
Port refers to the port used by the proxy.
In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the proxy.
In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the proxy.
POP3 receiving options define how the test e-mails are received and handled by Nemo Outdoor.
Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if
there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, transfer will
fail.
Buffer size defines the transmit/receive buffer used with the transfer protocol in kilobytes.
Maximum number of messages to receive defines the maximum number of messages received
from the e-mail server.
Select the Delete messages after receiving option to delete all received test e-mails. This will save
disk space.
The View button opens a received test message in the E-Mail Editor dialog.

Configuring the SMTP Protocol


POP3, SMTP, and IMAP testing offers the possibility to send emails through Nemo Outdoor and to
monitor how the message is transferred. POP3 and IMAP protocols are used for receiving and SMTP
protocol for sending emails.

A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the dial-up
server (number, username, and password) are operator-specific.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 25

To set up data measurements using SMTP


1. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and
to connect and configure the measurement devices.
2. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (see Measurement
Properties Measurement)
3. Configure the data connection for CS data (see Data Call Properties) or PS data (see Packet
Session Settings).
4. Define SMTP Server settings in the E-Mail Settings SMTP dialog. Also define the test e-mails
that are used in the measurement.
5. Create a script (optional) (see Making Script Files).
6. After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer (see Making Data
Transfers).

E-Mail Settings SMTP


Open the E-Mail Settings (SMTP) dialog by double-clicking the SMTP item in the Devices view.

SMTP Server Settings define settings for the SMTP server used in the measurements.
Server name defines a name or an IP address for the SMTP server.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections, each connection must have its
own IP address.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal, the same IP
address can be used.

1 26

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Note that some operators prevent accessing SMTP services other than their own. Therefore, it
is not possible to test SMTP against the Nemo server with those operators' SIM cards.
Port refers to the port used by the SMTP server.
In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the SMTP server.
In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the SMTP server.
Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection
to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time, connection attempt will
fail.
Select the Use SSL encryption option to apply SSL encryption to the test email.
Proxy server settings define settings for the proxy server used in the measurements.
Proxy type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. Supported types are Tunneling,
SOCKS4, and SOCKS5.
Address refers to the address of the proxy.
Port refers to the port used by the proxy.
In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the proxy.
In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the proxy.
Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if
there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, transfer will
fail.
Buffer size defines the transmit/receive buffer used with the transfer protocol in kilobytes.
Messages to be sent defines the test messages used in the SMTP test. Click the Edit button to open
the E-Mail Editor where you can type the test message and attach files to the message.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 27

E-Mail Editor
Use the E-Mail Editor dialog to type and edit test messages. You can attach files to the test
messages and save messages for later use.

New E-Mail Message button saves the current changes and opens an empty E-Mail Editor.
Open E-Mail Message button opens an Open dialog where you can open premade e-mail messages.
Save E-Mail Message button saves the current e-mail message for later use.
Save As button saves the current e-mail message with a different name for later use.
Save Attachments button saves the files attached to the test message to a selected location.
Attachments field displays a list of attachments in the test e-mail.
Add button opens an Open dialog for adding an attachment to the test message.
Remove button removes the selected attachment from the test message.

Configuring the IMAP Protocol


POP3, SMTP, and IMAP testing offers the possibility to send emails through Nemo Outdoor and to
monitor how the message is transferred. POP3 and IMAP protocols are used for receiving and SMTP
protocol for sending emails.

A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the dial-up
server (number, username, and password) are operator-specific.

To set up data measurements using IMAP


1. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and
to connect and configure the measurement devices.

1 28

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

2. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (see Measurement


Properties Measurement)
3. Configure the data connection for CS data (see Data Call Properties) or PS data (see Packet
Session Settings).
4. Define IMAP Server settings in the E-Mail Settings IMAP dialog. Also define the test e-mails that
are used in the measurement.
5. Create a script (optional) (see Making Script Files).
6. After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer (see Making Data
Transfers).

E-Mail Settings IMAP


Open the E-Mail Settings (IMAP) dialog by double-clicking the IMAP item in the Devices view.

IMAP server settings define settings for the IMAP server used in the measurements.
Server name defines a name or an IP address for the server.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections, each connection must have its
own IP address.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal, the same IP
address can be used.
Port refers to the port used by the server.
In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the server.
In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the server.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 29

Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection
to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time, connection attempt will
fail.
Select the Use SSL encryption option to apply SSL encryption to the test email.
Proxy server settings define settings for the proxy server used in the measurements.
Proxy type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. Supported types are Tunneling,
SOCKS4, and SOCKS5.
Address refers to the address of the proxy.
Port refers to the port used by the proxy.
In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the proxy.
In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the proxy.
IMAP receiving options define how the test e-mails are received and handled by Nemo Outdoor.
Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if
there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, transfer will
fail.
Buffer size defines the transmit/receive buffer used with the transfer protocol in kilobytes.
Maximum number of messages to receive defines the maximum number of messages received
from the e-mail server.
Select the Delete messages after receiving option to delete all received test e-mails. This will save
disk space.
The View button opens a received test message in the E-Mail Editor dialog.

Configuring the WAP Protocol


The WAP testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred through the WAP
protocol. The WAP protocol is used, for example, in web browsing. In the WAP testing, the user
selects one file that will be downloaded through the WAP protocol and this data transfer is measured.

A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the dial-up
server (number, username, and password) are operator-specific.

To set up data measurements using WAP


1. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and
to connect and configure the measurement devices.
2. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (see Measurement
Properties Measurement)
3. Configure the data connection for CS data (see Data Call Properties) or PS data (see Packet
Session Settings).
4. Define WAP Gateway settings in the WAP Transfer Properties dialog.
5. Create a script (optional) (see Making Script Files).

1 30

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

6. After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer (see Making Data
Transfers).

WAP Transfer Properties


Open the WAP Transfer Properties dialog by double-clicking the WAP item in the Devices view.

WAP transfer properties define settings for the WAP gateway used in the measurements.
WAP gateway host defines a name or an IP address for the WAP gateway. Note that if you have
multiple simultaneous data connections, each connection must have its own IP address.
WAP gateway port refers to the port used by the WAP gateway.
Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection
to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time, connection attempt will
fail.
Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if
there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, transfer will
fail.
URL defines the IP address of the test file that will be downloaded. For example,
http://www.yourcompany.com/testfile.htm. Only one file will be downloaded at a time.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals, you must
define a different URL from different servers for each of them.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal, the same
URL can be used.

If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the computer where
you are running Nemo Outdoor.
To make consecutive downloads, create a script with several WAP transfers. See chapter Making
Script Files for instructions on making scripts.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 31

Local file defines the output file and location for WAP testing. The default location for these files is
defined in the User Interface Properties Paths dialog.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to receive
for all of them, you must define a different local file for each connection. Otherwise the different
data connections will try to write in the same file.

Configuring the Streaming Protocol

Note that to make video streaming quality measurements, Microsoft Network Monitor must be
installed and IP packet capturing must be enabled. Refer to chapter IP Packet Capturing for
more information.
The Streaming testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred through the
streaming protocol. The streaming protocol is used, for example, in video streaming. In the streaming
testing, the user selects one file that will be downloaded through the streaming protocol and this data
transfer is measured.

A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the dial-up
server (number, username, and password) are operator-specific.
In order to make streaming measurements with Nemo Outdoor version 7.20 onwards, you need to
have VLC player v. 2.1.0 or newer installed. With Nemo Outdoor versions 6.40 - 7.10, you need to
have VLC player v. 2.0.6 or newer (32-bit) installed on the computer. You can download VLC from
Nemo User Club http://nemouserclub.anite.com (Nemo Outdoor - Drivers for Test Mobiles and Other
Devices) or from http://www.videolan.org/vlc.
With Nemo Outdoor 6.2 and older versions, you need to have RealPlayer version 11 installed on the
computer. You can download RealPlayer 11 from Nemo User Club http://nemouserclub.anite.com
(Nemo Outdoor - Drivers for Test Mobiles and Other Devices).

To set up data measurements using streaming:


1. Install VLC.
2. Install Microsoft Network Monitor.
3. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and
to connect and configure the measurement mobile.
4. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties Measurement dialog. Also
define the test files that are used in the measurement.
5. Configure the data connection for CS data (see Data Call Properties) or PS data (see Packet
Session Settings).
6. Define Streaming properties (see Streaming Properties).
7. Create a script (optional) (see Making Script Files).
8. After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer (see Making Data
Transfers).

1 32

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Streaming Properties
Open the Streaming Properties dialog by double-clicking the Streaming item in the Devices view.

Note that if the Streaming item is not available in the Devices view, VLC is not installed on the
computer. You can download a free player from http://www.videolan.org/vlc.

URL defines the IP address (http or rtsp) of the video file that will be streamed. For example,
rtsp://yourcompany.com/testfile.rm or videos from YouTube (m.youtube.com/video). Only one file will
be downloaded at a time. Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections, you must
define a different URL from different servers for each of them. To make consecutive downloads,
create a script with several streaming sessions. See chapter Making Script Files for instructions on
making scripts.
Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection
to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time, connection attempt will
fail.
Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if
there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, transfer will
fail.
Rebuffering timeout defines the maximum allowed buffering duration during video playback.
Select the Display video stream option if you would like to view the test clip during the streaming.
Select the Streaming quality option to activate streaming video quality measurements with PVI.

Configuring the Trace Route Protocol


By conducting Trace Route testing functionality, you can trace the servers pinged along the way to the
target server.
Ping trace route testing can be used to help troubleshooting network or Internet connections. The ping
utility tests responsiveness between two hosts, etc. With ping trace route testing it is also possible to
check responsiveness and trace the path of the packet from one host to another. In case the network
does not respond to ping or trace route requests with trace route testing, it is possible to show the
location right before the host that is not responding.

A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the dial-up
server (number, username, and password) are operator-specific.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 33

To set up data measurements using the Trace Route Protocol


1. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and
to connect and configure the measurement devices.
2. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (see Measurement
Properties Measurement)
3. Configure the data connection for CS data (see Data Call Properties) or PS data (see Packet
Session Settings).
4. See below how to define Trace Route properties.
5. Create a script (optional) (see Making Script Files).
6. After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer (see Making Data
Transfers).

Trace Route Properties


Open the Trace Route Properties dialog by double-clicking the Trace Route item in the Devices
view.

The Remote host field defines the IP address or URL of the target server of the trace route
measurement, for example, www.anite.com. You can use Packet Data Tester or any IP server. Just
make sure that the IP server used will respond to the ping.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections with different terminals, each
connection must be given its own, separate IP address!

Note that if you are doing multiple simultaneous data transfers on a single terminal, the same IP
address can be used!

If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the computer on
which you are running Nemo Outdoor.
Transfer timeout determines the maximum timeout seconds since the beginning of the operation.
HOP timeout defines the maximum amount of time to wait for an individual hop to complete.
HOP limit defines the maximum number of servers to be pinged along the way to the target server.
By selecting the Resolve host names item, the names of the pinged servers will be reported by Nemo
Outdoor.

1 34

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Making Data Transfers


After you have configured the data connection (CS or PS data) and selected and configured the data
protocol (Iperf (TCP/UDP), FTP, SFTP, HTTP, Browsing, POP3, SMTP, IMAP, WAP, or streaming),
you can start making the data transfers.

Note! Firewall must be deactivated when making data transfers.

To make data transfers:


1. Activate the script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts

button.

Note that after you have activated the script, you cannot control the measurement manually
until the script is finished or you interrupt the script by clicking the Stop Scripts button.
2. To make manual CS data calls, click the Measurement control button in the Devices view and
select Start Data Call. Wait until the call is connected and dial-up connection established. Then
select
3. To make manual PS data calls, click the Measurement control button in the Devices view and
select Start Packet Session. Nemo Outdoor will automatically activate the PDP context and make
the GPRS attach.
4. To end the data transfer/data call, select Stop Packet Session/ Stop Data Call.

STREAMING VIDEO QUALITY TESTING


Streaming video quality testing allows you to monitor how streaming video is transferred in the
network. Data streaming can be made manually and with scripts. Nemo Outdoor supports PVI and
PEVQ-S streaming video quality testing. A video preview can be seen during the measurement in
Nemo Outdoor.

Note that it is only possible to make single video quality measurements.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 35

Before starting video streaming quality measurements, select the video quality algorithm used, PEVQS or PVI, from the Device Configuration Voice/Video quality page.

In order to be able to make streaming video quality measurements using PEVQ-S, you will need to
install WinPCAP v. 4.1.3 and Flash Player on the computer and to define PEVQ-S settings in the
PEVQ-S dialog. WinPCAP and Flash Player are available in the Nemo product package and Nemo
User Club or you can download them from the product websites.
In order to be able to make streaming video quality measurements using PVI, you will need to install
VLC 2.0.6 or newer on the computer and to define streaming video settings in the Streaming
Properties dialog. VLC is available in the Nemo product package and Nemo User Club or you can
download it from the product website.

PVI video quality parameters are not available with 64-bit operating systems. PVI streaming
without video quality parameters is supported with both 32- and 64-bit operating systems.

Making streaming video quality measurements with PEVQ-S:


1. Check that WinPCAP v. 4.1.3 and Flash Player are installed on the computer.
2. Select the PEVQ-S option from the Device Configuration Voice/video quality page.
3. Define the PEVQ-S settings in the PEVQ-S Properties dialog.

1 36

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

4. Start recording by clicking the Start Recording button . From the Measurement menu, select
All Devices | Start/Stop Data Transfer to start the data transfer with all test devices or <device
name> | Start/Stop Data Transfer to start the data transfer with just one device.
5. You can view, for example, from a line graph some streaming parameters. Open a line graph (Data
| Line Graph | New). Press the Add New Layer button and select Video Quality MOS in the Y
field and click OK. The graph will now display the selected parameter.
6. From the Measurement menu, select Start/Stop Data Transfer to end the data transfer or wait
until the entire video clip has been streamed.

Making streaming video quality measurements with PVI:


1. Check that VLC is installed on the computer.
2. Define the video streaming settings in the Streaming Properties dialog.
3. Start recording by clicking the Start Recording button . From the Measurement menu, select
All Devices | Start/Stop Data Transfer to start the data transfer with all test devices or <device
name> | Start/Stop Data Transfer to start the data transfer with just one device.
4. You can view, for example, from a line graph some streaming parameters. Open a line graph (Data
| Line Graph | New). Press the Add New Layer button and select Video Quality MOS in the Y
field and click OK. The graph will now display the selected parameter.
5. From the Measurement menu, select Start/Stop Data Transfer to end the data transfer or wait
until the entire video clip has been streamed.

PEVQ-S Properties
When making video streaming quality measurements with the PEVQ-S algorithm, you need to define
some settings in the PEVQ-S Properties dialog.

Video offers a selection of preloaded videos that can be used in the testing. Only these preloaded
videos can be used for testing. The videos must be stored in folder Nemo Tools\Video Files.
Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if
there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, the transfer
will fail.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 37

VOIP CALLS
With the optional VoIP module combined to Nemo Outdoor, a
user is able to perform IP telephony measurements on the IP
networks based on the established VoIP sessions.
In order to be able to make VoIP call measurements, you will
need to install a SIP server. Nemo Outdoor VoIP system is
compatible with Asterisk SIP Server. To find more information
on installing the Asterisk SIP server, login to
http://www.asterisk.org/applications/pbx
To start making VoIP call measurements, you will need to
define some VoIP session settings in the SIP Server Settings
and VoIP Call Configuration dialogs. Open the SIP Server
Settings dialog by double-clicking the SIP Server item in the
Devices view.

Domain defines the address of the SIP server, e.g. pbx.nemo.fi.


Port defines the SIP port. The default SIP port is 5060.
Username/Password defines the username that the user has registered to the server and the
corresponding password.
Connection timeout defines the timeout while trying to connect to the server.
Registration duration defines the duration for which the SIP registration is valid.
Automatic registration, when selected, automatically registers the user to the SIP server (as soon as
Packet Session has been created).
When selected, Use SIP proxy option enables the user to send outbound SIP messager via Proxy.
Proxy address/port defines the proxy, through which SIP messages are sent.

1 38

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Open the VoIP Call Configuration dialog by double-clicking the VoIP Call item in the Devices view.

SIP callee address defines the SIP address of the call receiver.
Audio codecs for the call can be selected from the list by selecting the box next to them. The order of
the codecs is significant since the first codec is offered as the primary codec when making a call to a
counterparty. For example, in the image above the primary codec offered for an outgoing call is
G729/8000. In addition, only selected codecs are used while negotiating the codec in the case of an
incoming call.
Select the Voice quality option to enable voice quality measurements for VoIP calls. Please note that
this option is available after you have selected the VoIP only option from the Device Configuration for
Mobiles and Modems dialog.
Reference sample filename refers to the file used as the reference sample in the voice quality
measurements. Click the Browse button to select a file.
Select the Save sample files option to save the received sample files on the laptop.
With the Prefix for received sample files option you can define a prefex that will be added to the
filename of all received sample files.
With the Save only samples below threshold option you choose to save only those samples that are
below a user-definable threshold (MOS score).
Script settings defines the duration of the call and the call attempt timeout in seconds.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 39

Making VoIP measurements:


1. Define SIP Server Settings and VoIP Call Configurations.
2. To start packet session, click on the Measurement control button

| Start Packet Session.

3. To register SIP server, click on the Measurement control button | Register SIP Server.
4. To start VoIP measurement, click on the Measurement control button | Start VoIP Call.
5. To end VoIP measurement, click on the Measurement control button | Stop VoIP Call.
6. Finally, to unregister SIP server, click on the Measurement control button | Unregister SIP Server
(Note: This is not a mandatory step, a new call can be made without unregistering)

FACEBOOK TESTING
In order to be able to test the Facebook application, you will need to set up a Facebook account.
To start running Facebook tests, you will need to define some Facebook settings in the Facebook
Configuration dialog. Open the dialog by double-clicking the Facebook item in the Devices view.

Please note that if the Facebook item is not visible in the Devices view, your Nemo Outdoor
license does not support Facebook testing.

1 40

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

If you already have a Facebook account, type in the Username. The username can be found from the
General Account Settings in Facebook.
Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if
there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, the transfer
will fail.
User access token is required for Facebook testing. Enter the username and click the Get Access
Token button. You will be redirected to the Facebook login page. Enter your account information and
select the Keep me logged in to option. Click Log In. You will return to Nemo Outdoor and an
access token will appear in the field.

Application ID and Application access token fields are required only if you have your own
application for accessing Facebook. Otherwise you can leave these fields empty and the Nemo Fabo
application will be used by default.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 41

You can define a Photo that will be uploaded on the wall of your Facebook profile.
Comment is text that will either be posted as a status update (without a photo) or as a caption for a
photo.
Limit for feed retrieval defines how many items or from how many days items will be retrieved from
the wall when the user executes the Get Wall Feed command.
After defining Facebook settings, return to the Devices view and start a packet session. Click the
Measurement control button and select one of the Facebook-related commands. The following
information is logged for each command: operation type, success/failure, time elapsed, and amount of
data received/sent.

Get friend list will download the friend list from you Facebook account.
Get wall feed will download the wall feed from you Facebook account. The amount of data
downloaded is defined by the Limit for feed retrieval setting in the Facebook Configuration dialog.
Post status update will upload the text typed in the Comment field and post it on the wall of your
Facebook profile.
Post photo will upload the photo selected in the Facebook Configuration dialog and the text typed in
the Comment field as caption on the wall of your Facebook profile.

1 42

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

SMS TESTING
SMS testing allows you to monitor how text messages are transferred in the network. Open the SMS
Testing dialog by double-clicking the Short Messaging Service item in the Devices view.

Phone Number defines the number of the mobile where you are sending the test messages. Enter
the number without spaces and with the international country code; for example, +3581234567.
Service Center Address defines the message center number of the mobile from where the messages
are sent. The number is found from the test mobile SMS settings.
Timeout defines the time in seconds after which the SMS sending attempt is terminated.
When the End-to-end message option is selected, a unique ID consisting of 42 characters is added
to the beginning of the message text when the SMS is sent. When the measurement file is added to
the Nemo Analyze database, Nemo Analyze is able to recognize the SMS and the time it took for it to
reach its destination from the time of sending during post-processing.
All handlers support sending and receiving concatenated SMS messages.
Message refers to the user-defined test message that will be sent. The limit is set to 15000
characters.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 43

Making SMS testing measurements:

Note that with CDMA terminals, before carrying out SMS testing in Nemo Outdoor, you must
send an SMS to the target phone number using the terminal's keypad. After that Nemo Outdoor
can be used to send the same message again.
1. Define the Phone Number (with the international country code and without spaces) where you are
sending the test SMS message.
2. Enter the Service Center Address of the test mobile from which you are sending the test SMS.
The number can be found from your mobile SMS Settings.
3. Define the Timeout, i.e., the time in seconds after which the SMS sending attempt is terminated.
4. Type in the test message and click OK.
5. Start recording by clicking the Start Recording button
. From the Measurement menu, select
All Devices | Send SMS Message to send an SMS with all test devices or <device name> | Send
SMS Message to send an SMS with just one device. Nemo Outdoor will send the test SMS.
6. You can view, for example, from a grid window if the test message was delivered successfully.
Open an event grid (Data | Events Grid | New). Open the Grid Properties dialog (right-click on
the grid and select Properties from the popup menu). Clear all selections and select the Short
Message Service item and click OK. The grid will now display only the selected SMS testingrelated events.

SMS Testing with CDMA Terminals


SMS testing with CDMA does not require you to do any configurations prior to SMS testing for the
terminal. The verified CDMA terminals supporting SMS testing are

Huawei C7600

LG C680

LG C676

LG KX206

LG KX256

LG VX8100

LG VX8350

LG VX8360

Samsung SCH A870

The testing goes as follows.


1. Connect and add the terminal to Nemo Outdoor.
2. Prior to starting SMS testing in Nemo Outdoor, send an SMS to the target phone number from the
phones keypad.
3. In the Devices view, click on the Measurement control button
and select Send SMS
Message. Nemo Outdoor sends the same message as was sent by the user from the actual
phone interface by retrieving the text message from the phones Saved messages folder.

1 44

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

MMS TESTING
MMS testing allows you to monitor how multimedia messages are transferred in the network. MMS
messages can be sent manually and with scripts. In addition to successfully sent/received MMS
messages, also sending/receiving attempts and sending/receiving failures are recorded enabling
statistical success rate calculations. Nemo Outdoor measures total MMS sending delay. Also separate
delays from Attach, PDP context activation, logging to MMSC, and message sending/receiving are
recorded.
In order to be able to make MMS measurements, you will need to define some MMS-related settings
in the Packet Session Settings dialog.

Note that you need to define the MMS settings also on the device receiving the MMS messages.

If you are using the Nokia 6630, 6680 or N80 mobile for MMS testing, please see chapter MMS
Settings for Nokia 6630, 6680, and N80. Some special MMS settings are required.

If you are using Nokia N95, 6120, and 6121 mobiles for MMS testing, please see chapter MMS
Settings for Nokia N95, 6120, and 6121. Some special MMS settings are required.

Please note that if you create a script for making MMS measurements, the script must not
contain a PDP activation command.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 45

Packet Session Settings for MMS


Open the Packet Session Settings - MMS dialog by double-clicking the Multimedia Messaging
Service item in the Devices view. The MMS tab is opened by default.
Packet Session settings are needed to establish the packet switched data connection. All the
parameters in the Packet Session and the Basic QoS and Extended QoS tabs are operator-specific.
You must select the correct parameters to make the packet transfer function. Contact the operator of
the network that you are measuring.

MMS
In the MMS tab, all the settings are required in order to make MMS measurements.

MMSC address defines the MMS Service Center address. This setting is operator-specific.
MMSC username defines the MMS Service Center username. This setting is operator-specific.
MMSC password defines the MMS Service Center password. This setting is operator-specific.
WAP gateway host refers to the WAP gateway host. This setting is operator-specific.
WAP gateway port refers to the port used by the WAP gateway. This setting is operator-specific.
Connection timeout defines the time in seconds after which the connection attempt is terminated.
Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds after which the MMS sending attempt is terminated.
Message to be sent refers to the test MMS message used in the measurement.
Message Editor button opens the MMS Editor dialog for editing and creating MMS messages.

1 46

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

MMS Editor
Use the MMS Editor dialog to type and edit test messages. You can attach files to the test messages
and save messages for later use.

New MMS Message saves the current changes and opens and empty MMS Editor.
Open MMS Message opens an Open dialog where you can open premade MMS messages.
Save MMS Message saves the current MMS message for later use.
Save As saves the current MMS message with a different name for later use.
Save Attachments saves the files attached to the test message to a selected location.
Attachments field displays a list of attachments in the test message.
Add opens an Open dialog for adding an attachment to the test message.
Remove removes the selected attachment from the test message.

Making MMS Measurements


Follow these step-by-step instructions for making MMS measurements.

You should have all the measurement devices connected and activated.

Note that you need to define the MMS settings also on the device receiving the MMS messages.

If you are using Nokia 6630, 6680 or N80 mobiles for MMS testing, please see chapter MMS
Settings for Nokia 6630, 6680, and N80. Some special MMS settings are required.

If you are using Nokia N95, 6120, and 6121 mobiles for MMS testing, please see chapter MMS
Settings for Nokia N95, 6120, and 6121. Some special MMS settings are required.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 47

Making MMS measurements:


1. Define the MMS-related Packet Session Settings (see Packet Session Settings for MMS).
2. Edit the test message and add the media attachments in the MMS Editor.
3. If you want to make automated measurements, create a script for MMS measurements (see
Making Script Files).
4. If you are making manual measurements, that is, not using a script, select Send MMS Message
from the Measurement control
menu or from the Measurement menu. Nemo Outdoor will
send the test MMS.
5. If you are using a script, activate the script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button. This will start
the measurement.
6. You can view, for example, from a grid window if the test message was delivered successfully.
Open an event grid (Data | Events Grid | New). Open the Grid Properties dialog (right-click on the
grid and select Properties from the popup menu). Clear all selections and select the Multimedia
Message Service item and click OK. The grid will now display only the selected MMS testingrelated events.

MMS Settings for Nokia 6630, 6680, and N80


You need to make some MMS settings for the Nokia 6630, 6680, and N80 mobiles before you can use
them in MMS testing with Nemo Outdoor.

Changing MMS settings for Nokia 6630, 6680, and N80:


1. On the phone main window, press Messag.

1 48

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

2. In the Messaging view, press Options.

3. From the menu, select Settings.

4. From the Settings view, select Multimedia message.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

5. Select the Access point in use option and change it to None.

6. Select the Recept. in home net. and change it to Off.

7. Select the Reception if roaming option and change it to Off.

8. Press Back and select Yes to confirm the changes. Finally switch the mobile on and off.

1 49

1 50

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

MMS Settings for Nokia N95, 6120, and 6121


You need to make some MMS settings for the Nokia N95, 6120, and 6121 mobiles before you can use
them in MMS testing with Nemo Outdoor.

Changing MMS settings for Nokia N95, 6120, and 6121:


1. On the phone main window, press Messaging.

2. In the Messaging view, press Options.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

3. From the menu, select Settings.

4. From the Settings view, select Multimedia message.

5. Select the Access point in use option and change it to None.

1 51

1 52

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

6. Select Multimedia retrieval and change it to Off.

7. Select Allow anon. msgs. and change it to Off by pressing the navigation button on the phone, or
by selecting Options| Change| No.

8. Press on the navigation key to change the setting for Receive adverts from Yes to No.

9. Press the navigation button on the phone to change the Receive report setting from Yes to No.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

10.Press Back and select Yes to confirm the changes. Finally switch the mobile off and on.

1 53

1 54

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

USSD TESTING
USSD testing allows you to monitor how USSD messages are transferred in the network. Open the
USSD Message dialog by double-clicking the USSD Message item in the Devices view.

Timeout defines the time in seconds after which the USSD sending attempt is terminated.
Message refers to the user-defined test message that will be sent. The limit for USSD messages is
182 characters.

Sending USSD messages:


1. Define the Timeout, i.e., the time in seconds after which the message sending attempt is
terminated.
2. Type in the test message and click OK.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 55

3. Start recording by clicking the Start Recording button


. In the Devices view, click the
Measurement Control button and select Send USSD Message to send a USSD message with just
one device. Nemo Outdoor will send the message.

4. You can view, for example, from a grid window if the test message was delivered successfully.
Open an event grid (Data | Events Grid | New). Open the Grid Properties dialog (right-click on
the grid and select Properties from the popup menu). Clear all selections and select the USSD item
and click OK. The grid will now display only the selected USSD message testing-related events.

START EXTERNAL APPLICATION


This feature allows users to launch external applications from Nemo Outdoor as a part of the
automatic measurement sequence. You can define the executable as well as the command-line
parameters. With Nemo Invex, you can run external applications also on the measurement servers
(UICs).
The external application can be used to launch any proprietary or third-party applications that are not
built into Nemo Outdoor. This enables, for example, the testing of data protocols that are not currently
supported by Nemo Outdoor. You can then monitor the data throughputs from the PPP data
throughput parameter.
The external application feature can also be used to test web browsing. An APP event is written to the
log file when a web browser is launched and closed. The user must set the cache size to minimum
from the browser settings.

1 56

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

The Start External Application dialog is accessed through the Script Editor, Add menu. Select Start
External Application from the menu.

Application Name defines the application that you want to run from Nemo Outdoor while making
measurements. Define the path where the application .exe file is located on your computer. For
example, C:\Program Files\Mozilla Firefox\firefox.exe.

Please note that clicking the Browse button will only show the folders on the local computer. If
you want to run an external application on a measurement server (Nemo Invex), check the path
from that server, for example, with Remote Desktop and type in the path manually.
If you select the Wait until completed option, the test script will be on hold until the external
application is closed.
Arguments defines what file or web page will be opened in the external application once it is started.
For example, if you start Internet Explorer, define here a URL (http://www.anite.com/nemo). You can
also leave the field empty. Note that there should be no spaces between the characters in the
pathname or target file specified in the Arguments field.
Working Folder refers to the folder that the application uses to open and save files. For example,
C:\Temp.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 57

ICMP PING
The ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol) Ping functionality allows you to perform ping
measurements simultaneously with data transfers.

Host name refers to the IP address or URL that is being pinged, for example, www.anite.com. You
can use Packet Data Tester or any IP server. Just make sure that the IP server used will respond to
the ping.
Packet size is the size of the ping packet that is used to measure ping time. The value determines the
size of the packet sent to the server. In addition, it determines the size of the reply packet that the
server uses to reply Nemo Outdoor.
Timeout determines the maximum time that Nemo Outdoor waits for a reply packet from the server. If
this time is exceeded, the ping measurement event will be created by using the timeout parameter
(=-1).
Delay defines the delay duration in milliseconds. In addition to the duration, also define where the
delay will occur. The options are:

Delay between requests which means the protocol will always wait for a reply before sending
new request. If the delay is less than the ping delay, a new request is sent immediately after
the reply.

Delay from reply to request which means a new ping is sent after a reply is received.

Select the Repeat n times option if you would like to define the number of times the ping
measurement is repeated.
Select the Repeat until stopped option if you would like to continue the ping measurement until you
stop it manually.

1 58

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Example 1. RTT time is 100ms and delay from reply to request is set to 1 s. New request is sent
every 1.1s (100ms + 1000ms). If delay between request is selected, a new request is sent every
1000ms.

Ping reply

Example 2. RTT time is 100ms and delay from reply to request is set to 50ms. New request is sent
every 150ms (100ms + 50ms). If delay between request is selected, a new request is sent every
100ms because the protocol always waits for a reply before sending a new request.

Ping reply

To make ping measurements:


1. Open the Ping Settings dialog by double-clicking the ICMP Ping item in the Devices view.
2. Define the required ping parameters and click OK.
3. Click the Start Recording button

4. In the Devices view, click on the Measurement control button


and select Start Packet
Session. Wait until the status field in the Device Status window says PDP Context Activated.
5. From the Measurement control menu, select Start ICMP Ping. If you selected the Ping until
stopped option in the Ping Settings dialog, select Stop ICMP Ping to stop the ping measurement.
Otherwise, the ping will be repeated the user-defined number of times.

MEASUREMENT PROFILES
To make the measurement configuration for different devices more convenient, you can create
measurement profiles. A measurement profile contains all the necessary settings for making data
transfers, voice/video calls, sending messages, etc. The measurement profiles can also be exported
to another Nemo Outdoor system. See chapter Export/Import Settings for more information on
exporting settings.
To create a new measurement profile, go to the Devices view and click the arrow button next to a
service (e.g. voice call or Facebook) and select Edit Measurement Profiles.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 59

In the Measurement Profiles dialog, click the Add button to create a new measurement profile for the
selected service or select one of the existing profiles. Type a name for the new measurement profile
and click OK.

A configuration dialog for the selected service is opened. Enter the required information and click OK.
The measurement profile is added to the Measurement Profiles dialog. In the future you can just select
the measurement profile from the list and start measuring.

IP PACKET CAPTURING
With IP packet capturing, network packets sent between IP addresses are stored in log files and can
be post-processed with a third party application such as Ethereal. A separate log file is generated for
each test terminal making data transfers.
In order to use IP packet capturing in Nemo Outdoor:
1. First, install Microsoft Network Monitor. Go to Microsoft website to download the free Network
Monitor installation package. Select the NM34_x86.exe (for 32-bit Windows) or NM34_x64.exe
(for 64-bit Windows) installation file and click on Download.
2. Once the installation file is downloaded, double-click on it. The Microsoft Network Monitor 3.4
dialog appears. Click Yes to continue installation and follow the steps in the installation wizard to
finish the installation.
3. Next, install Nemo Outdoor.
4. For 64-bit Windows you need to install an additional setup of Nemo Packet Monitor x64 7.x.x.exe
(Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Packet Monitor must be of the same version) found in the Nemo
Outdoor product package. Double-click the file and follow the steps in the installation wizard to
finish the installation.
5. Start Nemo Outdoor, add a device, and go to the Measurement Properties, Measurement page.
Select the Enable IP Capture option.

1 60

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Note that if the Enable IP Capture item is not on the list, the Network Monitor driver is not
installed.

IP packet capture measurement option has four states: disabled, enabled, partial, and full.

Disabled: IP packet monitoring is not performed at all

Enabled: a separate .pcap file is not written but, for example, KPI, IP service access time is
recorded

Partial logging: only message headers are recorded

Full logging: all messages are recorded

The IP packet data is stored in a separate file (.pcap) for each measurement terminal for which IP
capturing is enabled.
To view data in Packet decoder grids during playback, you need to enable the packet decoding
function prior to performing data measurements. Select Full logging in the Enable IP Capture field. A
separate .pcap-file will be generated for the measurement. This file needs to accompany the
measurement file in the same folder when viewing and decoding packet capture information in Packet
Decoder grids in Nemo Outdoor.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 61

MAKING SCRIPT FILES

Note that it is not possible to use scripts with scanners.


The script file is an ASCII file containing the list of numbers that are to be called. The extension for
script files is .nsfx or .nsf (old script format). You can edit the Script file configuration in the Script
Editor dialog. When editing scripts, it is possible to have several Script Editor dialogs open and to
copy and paste commands from one script to another.
You can access this dialog by selecting Measurement | Script Editor (Ctrl+E).

The table in the middle will show a list of all functions and parameters that will be executed during a
measurement.
Click the Add button to add commands in the script.
Modify can be used to edit an existing script entry. Select a row from the table and click the button to
change the settings for that function.
Delete deletes the selected entry row.
Move Up moves the selected entry row up by one row in the script.
Move Down moves the selected entry down by one row in the script.
Insert Script can be used to insert the contents of another script file into the current script.
Repeat Script value defines how many times the script will be repeated during the measurements.
The range of repeat script values is from 1 to 10,000.
When the Use device settings for script commands option is selected, the settings that have been
configured in the Measurement Properties dialog are used for the script settings. For example, if you
have defined a Voice number in the Measurement Properties Configuration dialog, that number is
used when you add a voice call in the script and the Voice Call Properties dialog does not appear.
New clears the entry fields for inserting new script values.
Open opens a dialog for selecting an existing script file to be modified or reviewed.

1 62

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Save saves the file with the existing name or if the script is a new one, opens a dialog for inserting the
file name.
Close exits the dialog.

Notes about script functions:

Scrambling code or removed scrambling code can be selected for conditional testing using the IF
loop

Examples of conditions:
o

Is different: If UMTS carrier RSSI is different than -70dBm


Whenever the value is other than -70dBm, IF condition is triggered

Is changed: If UMTS carrier RSSI is changed


Whenever the UMTS carrier RSSI value changes, the IF condition is triggered.
The reference value is unknown, which means that when starting the measurement
and when the first UMTS carrier RSSI value is received, the IF condition is triggered.
The next trigger occurs when the carrier RSSI value is different from the previous
value. For example,
1. Carrier RSSI value in the log file: -70dBm triggers the IF string
2. Carrier RSSI value -70dBm nothing happens
3. Carrier RSSI value -68dBm Triggers the IF string

Script Transfer Stop Commands


With the forced stop command it is possible to abort a current script command. For example, a data
transfer can be canceled if the serving system changes, instead of waiting for its completion. It is also
possible to set a time duration for data transfers. If a data transfer is not completed during a userdefined time, the Nemo Outdoor application will abort the data transfer automatically. Please note that
in this case the data disconnection status is written as Normal data disconnect.

The forced stop command, e.g., with voice calls, can be used in conjunction with conditional or wait
commands as well. For example, if a call should be stopped when the system changes from GSM to
UMTS, the forced stop command can be used to end the call immediately after the system changes.
In the example below, the voice call is started only when the serving system is GSM. Call duration is
set to 120 seconds. It should be noted that the actual call duration is set with line three, Wait until
system is UMTS but at most 120s. After the call is connected, the script starts waiting for the system
to be changed to UMTS, or at most 120 seconds. The call is ended with End a voice call (forced)
with line 4 after 120 seconds, or when system changes to UMTS; whichever comes first.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 63

GSM voice call example. Voice call is started only in GSM and aborted when system changes to UMTS.

The forced stop command can be used also to stop active data transfers. In the example below the
script waits until the system changes to UMTS. Once the system is in UMTS, the script waits 5
seconds before making a voice call followed by PDP context activation and FTP data transfer. The
script stops, waiting until the system changes to GSM, but at most for 60 seconds. If the system
changes to GSM before 60 seconds, the voice call is continued normally until a 60-second call
duration is reached. FTP data transfer is aborted immediately when the system changes to GSM, or
after 60 seconds, whichever comes first. If line eight were End a voice call (forced), the voice call
would be stopped immediately after inter-RAT handover occurred.

In the following you will see a PS data and voice call example. The data transfer is aborted when the
system changes to GSM, or after 60 seconds; voice call is continued. The call duration is 60 seconds.

1 64

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

In the following you will see another PS data and voice call example. The data transfer and voice call
are aborted when the system changes to GSM, or after 60 seconds, whichever comes first.

The voice call is aborted when the system changes to GSM, or after 60 seconds, but data transfer is
continued normally with the Stop FTP transfer (Normal) command.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 65

Add Menu

The Add menu contains all the items that can be used in a script. Selecting an item may open a dialog
where you need to define some parameters and settings. See earlier chapters for more detailed
information on the dialogs. The Start External Application item is described in more detail in chapter
Start External Application.
In the Script Editor, by clicking Add and selecting Send DTMF Characters you are able to send
DTMF sequences. You can e.g. make calls to service numbers that work by using DTMF tones. This
command can only be used during voice calls.

1 66

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Receive Call
In the Incoming Call Configuration dialog you can define settings for incoming calls.

Call duration determines the time that the call lasts in seconds. The duration timer is started from the
channel assignment. The range of duration values is from 1 to 1,000,000 seconds. Note that the
maximum value of this parameter is the same as the value you have set as the Delay Between
Call Attempts parameter.
Call reception timeout value determines the maximum duration of the call reception attempt. If the
value is exceeded before the cellular system has assigned a traffic channel, the call reception attempt
will be stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure. The range of the Call Reception Timeout
value is from 5 to 60 seconds. The value is recommended to be at least 10 seconds.
Select the Enable Nemo Server connection option to enable incoming calls from Nemo Server.
Nemo Server Settings button opens the HTTPS Options dialog where you can define connection
settings.
Own number defines the devices phone number.
Server line defines the Nemo Server phone number.
Select the Enable Voice quality option to activate the voice quality settings. Note that the voice
quality settings are available only if your license supports voice quality measurements.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 67

Reference sample filename defines the reference sample to which the received audio sample is
compared. If you want to use your own test samples, make sure that the samples are of 8KHz
sampling rate, 16-bit linear coded .wav files that are no longer than six seconds in length. With the
Terratec sound card, sampling rate can be 8kHz or 16 kHz (for WB-AMR testing) and sample length a
maximum of 30 seconds. For ECHO measurements, use one of the following samples: 10s.wav,
4s_m.wav, 8s.wav, ru_6s.wav, and ru_6s_wb.wav.
Select the Save sample files option to save the received voice quality sample files.
Prefix for received sample files refers to the prefix that is added to the file names of received audio
sample files. If you leave this field empty, the received audio files are not stored. When a prefix is
defined, Nemo Outdoor names the files as follows: prefix_mos_date_time.wav where prefix is the
user-defined prefix, mos the voice quality score on a MOS scale with one decimal precision but
without decimal point, date in DDMMYYYY format, and time in HHMMSS format. For example:
terminal1_34_15112004_143045.wav.
Save only samples below threshold determines the value below which the samples are saved. The
threshold values range from 0-5, 0 being the worst and 5 the best value. The default threshold value is
5, which means that all samples are saved.

Note that the Script Settings table is activated only if you access this dialog through the Script
Editor.

Note that with voice quality measurements when calling the Nemo audio server, the delay time
between a new call attempt and the previous call disconnect must be at least 10 seconds.

1 68

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Wait Settings
To add pauses in the script, select Wait. In the Wait Settings dialog you can define different
conditions for the wait. You can also define custom conditions.

With the Wait until the time is option you can define a point in time after which the script continues.
With the Wait for all scripts to be synchronized option you can place multiple synchronization points
inside the script file. Nemo Outdoors script group functionality enables you to synchronize the script
files and/or certain lines in the script file for certain devices. Both synchronization methods can be
used together or separately depending on needs of the user.
In the following example below both devices are doing PS data transfers. The idea is to start FTP
download simultaneously. Script files for both devices are identical except that IP address is
different. Wait for script synchronization command has been selected for both devices in the
Wait settings dialog. The Wait for script synchronization is seen on line two for both devices.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 69

Both devices have been assigned for the same script group called PS data.

Script groups are useful especially if certain devices and when script files are needed to be
synchronized. In this example, it is not necessary to use the script group. As many synchronization
points as needed can be added to the script files. It should be noted that the number of
synchronization points between script files used in the same script group should be equal.
With the Wait Fixed and Random options you can define a fixed wait time (in seconds) or a random
time (define the minimum and maximum values in seconds) and then select one of the following:

Current time: wait (fixed or random) is added between items in the script.

Last notification: wait (fixed or random) is added after the selected notification. Select the
notification from the drop-down menu. For example, you can make the script pause for 60
seconds after a call attempt event. This will prevent the script from continuing before the call
attempt has completed. Note that also custom-made notifications can be selected here.

With the Custom condition option you can make the script wait for a custom condition. Click the
Edit Rules button to access the Wait Custom Conditions dialog where you can define a wait
condition. For example, you can define a specific parameter value.

1 70

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Next notification: script waits for the selected event notification to appear. Select the notification
from the drop-down menu. For example, you can make the script wait until the system changes
from GSM to UMTS.

Current system is: script file continues only when the system selected from the drop-down menu
is in use.

But at most value is the maximum wait time in seconds if the defined notification does not
appear.

Adding a pause in the script file:


1. First define the wait time in seconds.
2. Then define from which point onwards the wait time is calculated: from the current time or after a
certain event notification, such as, call attempt.
3. If you selected the Last notification or Next notification option, define also the maximum wait time in
seconds after which the script will continue.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 71

Advanced Script Settings


Conditional Blocks
By selecting Advanced | If/End If, you will enter the If Condition Settings dialog. Here you can
define criteria which have to be met until a set of commands between the If - End If block in the script
takes place. If the criteria set in this dialog are met, Outdoor will perform the set of commands within
the If - End If block, and if the criteria are not met, this set of commands will be skipped altogether and
the script resumes from the first item after the End If command.

Click on the Field tab to select a system and a parameter from the drop-down menu. In the Condition
and Value fields you can define the value conditions for the parameter which have to be met for the
commands inside the If-End If block to take place. In this example the serving system must be UMTS
FDD. You can select the system in the Value drop-down menu. Click Add to list to add the condition
to the list. If you want to remove the condition from the list, select it and click Remove. Click OK.
Next, add commands to the script from the Add menu, and move them to their appropriate places with
the Move Up and Move Down tabs. In the following example script, Serving sys.=5 on the fourth row
in the Parameters field indicates the criteria that were set earlier. If the criteria are met, the commands
between the If Condition and End If commands will be performed.

1 72

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Loops
You can add loops in the script files. By going to Add | Advanced | Loop/End Loop, you will enter the
Loop Settings dialog.

You can select from the following loop options:

Repeat the loop x times

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

Repeat the loop for x minutes

Repeat the loop until the time is x

Repeat the loop as long as the following criteria are met

1 73

With the Repeat the loop as long as the following criteria are met option you can set conditions for
the loop to take place. Click the Field button to select a parameter. Then define the condition and
value for the selected parameter. Finally click Add to list and OK to add the loop in the script.
In the first example, the loop has been set to be repeated twice before continuing with the script. Click
OK and add the wanted script commands in the script from the Add menu. You can move the
commands to their appropriate places with the Move Up and Move Down tabs. In the example below
the voice call within the loop will be repeated twice before continuing with the script.

1 74

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

The second loop option allows the user to define criteria which need to be met for the loop to be
repeated. In the example below the system and parameter (UMTS | Ec/N0 (Active)) have been
selected from the Field drop-down menu. The condition for the loop is that the parameter value needs
to be greater or equal to -5. Click Add to list and OK. The commands inside the loop block will be
performed only and as long as the Ec/N0 (Active) value is greater or equal to -5.

In the example below the script is set to start and continue making calls only when and as long as the
call is connected to UMTS. As soon as there is a handover from UMTS to GSM, the call stops.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 75

Counters and Timers


Counters and timers can be used with If and Loop commands as conditions. With a counter you can
define a number of instances and with a timer you can define a certain time in seconds.
Click the Add button in the Script Editor and select Advanced | Counter or Advanced | Start Timer.
Define a name for the counter/timer and click OK. The counter/timer can now be selected as a
condition in the If and Loop Condition Settings dialogs.

1 76

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Below is an example of a script with both a timer and a counter. On row three there is a loop
command with a counter condition called GSM calls and a timer condition called Duration. The loop is
configured to repeat a voice call until one of the following conditions is met: number of calls in a GSM
system is five or the loop has been running for 600 seconds.

Running Scripts
After you have created a script, it will be saved and you can load it for measurements later on.

To run the script file:


1. In the Measurement Properties, Scripts dialog, select the script in the Script File field. Note that
you need to define the script for each device individually. The script can be different for each
device.
2. Activate the Start/Stop Scripts (F8) button . Nemo Outdoor will start running the measurement
according to the script file. Note that if you have selected the Start Scripts Automatically option in
the User Interface Properties General dialog, Nemo Outdoor will start running the script when you
click the Start Recording button.
3. The program will now conduct the measurement as defined in the script file.
4. During measurements, you can stop and start the script for each measurement device individually
while the other devices will continue running their scripts. Select a device and click the Start/stop
script state for selected device button
in the Devices view. You can then control the device
manually.
5. After the script is finished, you can stop the recording (Measurement | Stop or Stop button

).

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 77

MEASUREMENT LISTS
Measurement lists enable you to run automated measurements with several devices combining
multiple scripts. You can use measurement lists with just one device to run several scripts one after
another. Each measurement is recorded in a separate file. You can also use measurement lists in idle
mode.
In Online mode, select Measurement | Start Measurement List to open the Measurement List
dialog.

Scheduled measurements displays a list of measurements that will be run when the measurement
list is started. Each measurement will be recorded in its own file. Click Add New to add new
measurements and Remove to delete selected measurements from the list.
Filename defines the filename format. The default format is %y%b%d %H%M%S (year-month-day
hours-minutes-seconds, e.g., 06May31 165246) but you can use any combination of the items below.
For example, "%y%b%d_%n means that the filename looks as follows: 06May31_1. The last number
(%n) is the sequence number for measurement files recorded that day.
%a

Abbreviated weekday name

%A

Full weekday name

%b

Abbreviated month name

1 78

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

%B

Full month name

%d

Day of month as decimal number (01 31)

%H

Hour in 24-hour format (00 23)

%I

Hour in 12-hour format (01 12)

%j

Day of year as decimal number (001 366)

%m

Month as decimal number (01 12)

%M

Minute as decimal number (00 59)

%n

Sequence number (1 )

%N

Sequence number (1 )

%p

Current locale's A.M./P.M. indicator for 12-hour clock

%S

Second as decimal number (00 59)

%U

Week of year as decimal number, with Sunday as first day of week (00 53)

%w

Weekday as decimal number (0 6; Sunday is 0)

%W

Week of year as decimal number, with Monday as first day of week (00 53)

%y

Year without century, as decimal number (00 99)

%Y

Year with century, as decimal number

%z

Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation, depending on registry settings;
no characters if time zone is unknown

%Z

Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation, depending on registry settings;
no characters if time zone is unknown

Measurement completion defines when the measurement list is finished.

Select the When all scripts are completed option to finish once all scripts have finished
running.

Select the After recording duration option to finish after recording has been going on for a
certain period of time. Define the time in hours and minutes (hh:mm).

Select the At measurement size option to finish when the total size of the measurement files
reaches a certain limit. Define the size in kilobits (KB).

Select the Save statistics to file option to enable the CSV file writing.
Select the Send measurement results to FTP server option to automatically upload the log files to
an FTP server after running the measurement list.
Devices table displays a list of devices connected to Nemo Outdoor.
Script file defines the script file used in the measurement. Click the Script Editor button to edit the
selected script.
Properties opens the Measurement Properties - Script dialog.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 79

Start runs the measurement list.


Click Load to load measurement lists and Save to save measurement lists. By default, measurement
list files (*.nmlx) are saved to the Configuration files folder. You can save and load measurement lists
to/from a file or to/from an FTP server.
To save a measurement list on an FTP server, select Save | Save To FTP Server. Click the FTP
Options button to define settings for the FTP server. See page 330 for more information on the
settings.
Define a name for the .aex file on your PC. The measurement list will be saved in this file.

To load a measurement list from an FTP server, select Load | From FTP Server. If you have not
defined any FTP server settings, the list will be empty. When FTP server settings are defined, a list of
exported measurement list files will appear. Select a file and click Open.

1 80

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Creating a measurement list:


1. Click the Add New button to add a new measurement.
2. Select a device from the Devices list.
3. Select a script from the Script File field. You can edit the selected script by clicking the Script
Editor button.
4. Repeat the previous steps until you have a complete measurement list.
5. Select the When all scripts are completed option. Finally, click Start.
6. The measurement list is finished after all scripts have been completed.
7. To save the measurement list, click Save.

FORCING FUNCTIONS
Nemo Outdoor offers a set of forcing functions that are accessible through the Nemo Outdoor user
interface. In addition to these, some terminals support more forcing features that are accessible via
the mobile keypad. See the terminal-specific data sheets for more information on the forcing features
available for each terminal.

Channel Locking
You can lock test mobiles to a channel and/or scrambling code during the measurement process. Note
that even though you are locking the mobile to a certain channel in idle mode, you are actually locking
the mobile only to the base station supporting that channel at that moment if you make a call. As the
base station can carry several channels simultaneously, the connection can be established or handed
over to another channel but not to another base station. In other words, the channel used cannot be
totally controlled by the mobile as the system will assign the channel.

To lock the Nemo Outdoor test mobile to a channel:

Note that when the channel lock is activated, the Neighbor Stations window displays only
Serving Cell values.

Note that if you are using the single mode, you must keep the test mobile connected to the
power cord. If the mobile is not connected to the power cord and the program switches it off,
you must switch the mobile on manually.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 81

1. When you have connected the measurement device, select the device and click the Measurement
settings button
in the Devices view and select Channel Locking. You can also select
Measurement | <device name> | Channel Locking. The Channel Locking dialog will appear on
your screen.

2. Enter the system and channel number and/or scrambling code within the given limits (it must be a
valid channel/scrambling code number) and click the Lock button. The button will remain pushed
down indicating that channel lock is activated. A red indicator will appear in the Device Status view
when a lock is activated.

3. Click the Unlock button in the Forcing Functions | Channel Locking dialog to release the
channel lock or select a new channel.

1 82

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Band Locking
You can use band locking if you want to compare how the network functions with different bands and
systems. Using the Band Locking dialog, you can force the mobile to use certain bands or system(s).
You can open the Band Locking dialog by selecting the device and clicking the Measurement
settings button
in the Devices view and choosing Band Locking.

Choose the band(s) or system(s) from the list and click the Lock button. This will lock the mobile to the
band/system you have chosen. Click Close to exit the dialog.
A red indicator will appear in the Device Status view when a lock is activated. To release the band
lock, open the Band Locking dialog and click the Unlock button.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 83

Network Selection
With Nemo Outdoor it is possible to manually register and deregister to and from a mobile network.
Click the Measurement Settings button in the Devices view and select Network Selection.

The Register, Deregister, and Scan functions are available only when the device is in detached
mode.
Select Manual, type in a PLMN ID, and click Register to register to a specific network. If you select
Automatic, the device will automatically select the network.

Note that if the device is registered to a network, it is recommended to deregister the device
before registering to another network. Especially when switching between operators. Also note
that all NMR devices have mobile data enabled and the devices are attached to a network so
they need to be deregistered.
Click the Scan button to scan for available networks. Note that the scanning may take several minutes
and it cannot be canceled. Select a network from the list by double-clicking the network name and
click Register. From the Device Status view you can observe the status of the device.
To switch back to Automatic mode, select Automatic and click Register.

1 84

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Handover Control

This functionality is available only with certain Nokia terminals.


Forcing handovers can be used to check that they work properly. You do not have to wait for the
mobile to make handovers, as you can, for example, force a handover to every neighbor cell.
Start a measurement and initiate a call (Measurement control button
| Start Voice Call). Open
the Handover Control dialog (Measurement settings button
| Handover Control). Define the
channel and handover type and click OK.

The BCCH ARFCN can be used to select the broadcast control channel (1-885) you want to force the
handover to.
The BSIC field defines the Base station identification code for the target cell.
The user has three mode request commands, Normal mode, Handover forcing and Handover
suppression. If the terminal accepts the command made by the user, the corresponding button will
indicate this. If the command fails, the user is notified. It is also possible to send the same command
several times without clicking other commands (i.e. send a new Handover Forcing command with
different bias values or forced the terminal to different scr. code, or in GSM to a different channel
without first deactivating HO forcing). For example, the device can be forced to scrambling code 6.
Once the terminal is locked to scrambling code 6, the user can set a new target cell and press the
Handover forcing button again.
The Target cell settings and Non-Target cell settings fields enable the user to define 3G offsets, i.e.
enhance target cell Ec/N0 and RSCP, and degrade non-target cell Ec/N0 and RSCP)

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 85

During Normal mode, forcing is disabled and the terminal performs 2G and 3G handovers normally.

The system field shown in the Target cell field shows in real time whether the serving system is GSM
or WCDMA. When the serving system is GSM, the target cell and non-target cell settings are disabled.
In case the current serving system is GSM, but the wanted target cell is in WCDMA, band locking can
be used first to lock the terminal to WCDMA.

1 86

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Once target cell settings including biasing information are defined by the user, handover mode can be
changed to Handover forcing mode by pressing the button. Handover forcing is done by biasing target
and non-target cell Ec/N0 and RSCP values. Therefore it is also possible to bias the current active
cell. For example, in the example below active set includes only one scrambling code. By pressing the
Handover forcing button, the terminal reports biasing Ec/N0 and RSCP values as set by the user.
When the mode is changed back to Normal mode the terminal reports unbiased values.

In the next example regarding Forced 3G handover and measurement report modification, the terminal
active set includes scrambling code 63 with Ec/N0 value -7.6dB shown as a brown curve. Scrambling
code 6 and 255 are seen in the monitored set with colors blue and green. Scrambling code 6 is
selected to be a target cell.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 87

Once the button is pressed, scrambling code number 6 is added to active set with Ec/N0 value -4.7dB.
Scrambling codes seen in the monitored set are decreased -10dB. Scrambling code 6 is seen with
Ec/N0 value -18.2dB (brown) and scrambling code 255 (green) is removed from the monitored set.

This situation is active as long as forcing/biasing is enabled. The device sends measurement reports
to the network with biased values.

Once the mode is changed back to normal, the terminal starts reporting unbiased values.

1 88

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

When the Handover suppression button is pressed, the terminal is not allowed to do handovers to
other cells. It should be noted that target cell biasing can be done only with WCDMA. Biasing/
measurement report message modification is not possible with GSM at the moment. You can use this
feature, for example, to find the edge of a cell by stopping the handovers from taking place when
driving away from a base station.

Note that with scripts you can also perform handover forcing from one system to another. See
chapter Making Script Files.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 89

Cell Barring

This functionality is available for Nokia 2G and Motorola 3G terminals.

During the measurement you can select if you wish to access only cells that are accessible to all end
users (Accept), all cells; that is, also cells that are barred (Ignore), and only barred cells (Reverse).
The Cell Barring dialog is accessed by selecting the device and clicking the Measurement settings
button
in the Devices view and choosing Cell Barring. You can also select Measurement |
<device name> | Cell Barring.

Set Terminal Radio On/Off (Airplane Mode)


It is possible to set the terminal radio on and off by selecting the device and clicking the Measurement
settings button
in the Devices view and selecting Set Terminal Radio On/Off. You can also
select Measurement | <device name> | Set Terminal Radio On/Off.
The Device Status view will display a red indicator when the terminal radio is off.

AMR Codec Forcing

This feature is available with Qualcomm-based devices.


It is possible to force a device to use a certain AMR codec mode. For example, when a UE is forced to
the WCDMA AMR WB codec, it can freely use any WB AMR codec from 6.6 kbps to 23.85 kbps..
The codecs are enabled/disabled from the Measurement Properties Measurement page.

1 90

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

CELL TESTING
The surrounding cells of a location can be tested through an automated list of test calls that are locked
to a cell at a time. The Cell Testing dialog is accessed by selecting the device and clicking the
Measurement settings button
in the Devices view and choosing Cell Testing. You can also
select Measurement | <device name> | Cell Testing.

Phone number defines the phone number that is called at the outset of the cell test. During the call
the neighbor list which defines the cells to be tested is updated. This is necessary since if the cell from
which the cell testing is performed is a strong one, without this call the neighbour list may remain
empty.
Test cases defines whether the user wishes to perform Voice call or Packet call testing or both by
selecting Voice & Packet in the drop-down menu. If the user selects both, the test starts with a voice
connection attempt, and after that the test continues with the attempt to create a PDP context with the
cell. The choice of test case also affects the displayed fields in this dialog. For example, if Voice call is
selected, no Packet call settings are displayed
RX level threshold: if the cell to be tested is a GSM cell, only cells stronger than the value defined
here will be included in the test

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 91

Ec/N0 threshold: if the cell to be tested is a UMTS cell, only cells that are stronger than this value will
be included in the test
Maximum number of calls defines the maximum number of calls that are made in the test
Voice call settings | Maximum number of retries defines the maximum number of retries to a cell if
no voice connection is formed. After the maximum voice connection attempts Nemo Outdoor
continues to the next cell or to packet call testing
Packet connection settings | Maximum number of retries defines the access point name for the
packet connection and the maximum number of retries for the connection attempts to a cell. After the
maximum voice connection attempts Nemo Outdoor continues to the next cell
Save results to file defines whether the report is saved to a file
Save results to clipboard defines whether the report is saved on the clipboard after testing.
The Test results page shows the progress of the test. The green color indicates successful attempts,
and the number the number of attempts.

MISSING NEIGHBOR DETECTION


Realtime missing neighbor detection can be performed with the possibility to detect both
GSM/WCDMA and CDMA missing neighbors at the same time. Missing neighbor measurements are
also supported on some Nokia terminals. You have three options in which to perform missing neighbor
detection:
1. with a mobile terminal supporting missing neighbor detection,
2. a scanner, or
3. a scanner and a mobile.

1 92

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Each cell has list of neighboring intra-frequency, inter-frequency, and inter-system cells. A terminal
sees/measures only cells in the neighbor list, whereas a scanner measures all available cells. Missing
neighbor detection is based on comparing scanner measurements with the neighbor list of the mobile.
Hence, a possible missing neighbor refers to a cell that is not in the neighbor list of the mobile at a
given time, but is detected/measured by the scanner. In mobile only missing neighbor measurements,
the mobile is able to detect also missing neighbors through the missing neighbor detection
functionality.

Missing Neighbor Detection with a Mobile


1. Connect your mobile phone to Nemo Outdoor.
2. In the Devices view, select the device and click the Measurement control button
. Select
Frequency Scanning Properties. Select BSIC decoding and Missing neighbor detection in the
Frequency scanning view. Next, click on Select Channels.

Note that both BSIC decoding and Missing neighbor detection need to be selected and Top-N
option deselected.
1. Select the channels for scanning in the Select Channels dialog.
2. Click OK and OK.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 93

3. Start the device by pressing on the work online button if you have not done this already, and
select Measurement control
| Start Single Shot Scanning or Start Continuous Scanning.

4. Once the selected scans have been performed, Nemo Outdoor compares the scanning results to
the neighbor list of the serving cell before scanning was initiated and reports possible detected
missing neighbors.

Missing Neighbor Detection with a Scanner/Scanner and Mobile


You will need a scanner or a scanner and a mobile. If you are performing missing neighbor detection
with a scanner only, the scanner needs either of the following options enabled: GSM Layer 3 or
GSM/WCDMA decoding. Note that missing neighbor detection using a scanner only is not
available for CDMA/EVDO.
A scanner scans all possible pilots whereas a mobile scans only channels that are on its neighbor list.
Nemo Outdoor compares these two measurements and, based on the data, reports the neighbor
channels that are seen by the scanner but are not in the mobile's neighbor list. You can observe the
missing neighbors in a bar graph and also view some important network parameters, such as,
difference to strongest, Ec/N0, and RSCP related to the missing neighbors.
Connect a mobile and a scanner to Nemo Outdoor. Configure the devices so that they are measuring
the same frequency and channels.
From Measurement | <device name>, select Missing Neighbor to open the following dialog. The
field displays the scanner(s) used. The user can also set a minimum RX level threshold for missing
neighbor. If the measured RX level is below the threshold, the channel is not detected as a missing
neighbor. Click on Enable to start the missing neighbor detection.

1 94

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

In GSM Missing Neighbor detection, the maximum number of missing neighbors is 32. However, note
that it is recommended to use default values to prevent false missing neighbor detection results.

Number of missing neighbors: Max. 32, default 3.

RX level: -50- -110dBm, default -95dBm

Open a bar graph, for example, with a Missing Neighbor Ec/N0 layer (Data | Bar Graph | New, click
the New Layer button and select the parameter in the Y box). The bar graph with the selected
parameter will display the missing neighbor channel(s).

PILOT POLLUTION ANALYSIS


Available for UMTS, CDMA and EVDO networks, Pilot Pollution Analysis measurements can be
performed in real time with Nemo Outdoor by using test terminals or a scanning receiver. In a pilot
pollution situation there are more active/monitored pilots than a handset can measure, or there is no
clear dominance for any pilots in the area. The pilot signal is used to distinguish cells in the network
from one another. Pilot pollution analysis is done based on CELL MEASUREMENT events, and
analysis is always active. The user can define thresholds for pilot pollution analysis via Nemo
Outdoors UI. Pilot pollution is detected when all the criterias match.
Right-click on the device in the Devices view and select Pilot Pollution Analysis.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 95

The user can define thresholds for pilot pollution analysis via Nemo Outdoor user interface.
Ec/N0 active set best below threshold (dB) (for UMTS): The default value is set to -12dB. Pilot
pollution analysis is done when the best reported active set Ec/N0 value is below -12dB.
Ec/I0 active set best below threshold (dB) (for CDMA and EVDO): The default value is set to -12dB.
Pilot pollution analysis is done when the best reported active set Ec/I0 value is below -12dB.
RSCP active set best above threshold (dB) (for UMTS): The default value is set to -95dBm. Pilot
pollution analysis is done when the reported active set best RSCP value is above -95dBm.
RSCP (Ec) active set best above threshold (for CDMA and EVDO): The default value is set to 95dBm. Pilot pollution analysis is done when reported active set best RSCP value is above -95dBm
Polluter level window from best active set cell (dB) (for UMTS): The default value is set to -6dB.
Pilot pollution analysis is done when the Ec/N0 values of polluting pilots are within -6dB from the best
active set Ec/N0 value.
Polluter level window from best active set cell (for CDMA and EVDO): The default value is set to 6dB. Pilot pollution analysis is done when Ec/I0 values of polluting pilots are within -6dB from the best
active set Ec/I0 value.
Pilot count threshold (for UMTS): The default value is set to 3. The number of cells that are within
the user-defined window from the Ec/N0 of active set best cell. The pilot count includes active and
monitored sets. For example, pilot pollution analysis is performed when more than three pilots are
detected within the user-defined window from the Ec/N0 of active set best cell.
Pilot count threshold (for CDMA and EVDO): The default value is set to 3. The number of cells that
are within the user-defined window from the Ec/I0 of active set best cell. Pilot count includes active
and neighbor sets. For example, pilot pollution analysis is performed when more than three pilots are
detected within the user-defined window from the Ec/I0 of active set best cell.
Start recording by clicking on the Start recording button

1 96

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

UMTS Pilot Pollution Analysis on Mobile Phone


Pilot pollution analysis results are written to a log file as an event of their own, called
CELLPOLLUTION.
The event includes the following information:

Source system

Source band

Source channel number

Pilot pollution scrambling code

Pilot pollution Ec/N0

Pilot pollution RSCP

Cell name of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used)

Cell ID of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used)

NOTE! Cell site file (BTS file) is not used with scanning receivers with Nemo Outdoor at the
moment.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

1 97

Note that pilot pollution analysis takes some time to happen, and the results are based on
earlier cell measurement events.

UMTS Pilot Pollution Analysis Based on Scanner


Measurements

Ec/N0 values for pilots are less than -12dB

Ec/N0 values of the pilots are within -6dB from the best Ec/N0 value

CDMA/EVDO Pilot Pollution Analysis - Mobile Phones


Pilot pollution analysis results are written to a log file as an event of their own, called
CELLPOLLUTION.
The event includes the following information:

Source system

Source band

Source channel number

1 98

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Pilot pollution scrambling code

Pilot pollution Ec/I0

Pilot pollution RSCP

Cell name of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used)

Cell ID of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used)

Note that pilot pollution analysis takes some time to happen, and the results are based on
earlier cell measurement events.

CDMA/EVDO Pilot Pollution Analysis - Scanners

Ec/I0 values for pilots are less than -12dB

Ec/I0 values of the pilots are within -6dB from the best Ec/N0 value

GSM INTERFERENCE ANALYSIS


In GSM mobile communication networks, system capacity is often limited by co-channel interference.
This is because of the surrounding cells using the same carrier frequency, or adjacent channel
interference when surrounding cells use a channel too close to the serving cell used by a terminal.
The GSM recommendations state that reference interference will be achieved at a minimum C/I
margin of 9 dB for co-channel interference, and that the margin is -9 dB C/I for adjacent channel
interference with voice. With packet switched data connection C/I margin should be much higher.
Interference source can be a BCCH or TCH channel, or it can be also from out of band in some
circumstances. ETSI 05.05 requirements for the interference rejection are:

Co-channel channel interference: z = 9 dB

200 kHz adjacent channel: z = -9dB

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

400 kHz adjacent channel: z = -41dB

600 kHz adjacent channel: z = -49dB

1 99

GSM co-channel and adjacent channel analysis is done in real time during the measurement and
playback with Nemo Outdoor. The user must enable interference analysis similarly, as with, e.g.
missing neighbor detection. Interference detection is done based on GSM terminal and GSM scanner
measurements and these measurements are combined together. GSM terminal continuously reports
RX level, RX quality and C/I values. With RX level and RX quality, the sub values are used to make
correct analysis in case DTX downlink is used.
In idle mode C/I and RX level values are used to trigger interference analysis from the BCCH channel.
A decent RX level with a simultaneous poor C/I value is a clear sign of an interference situation. Once
triggering is done, the power of BCCH channel used by a terminal is measured also by a scanning
receiver. BCCH decoding must be enabled with a scanning receiver to decode BSIC information.
Power of adjacent channels are (+/ - 1) is also measured by the scanning receiver. It should be noted
that the C/I value is not available with all test terminals in idle mode. Due to this limit interference
analysis in idle mode cannot be performed with all GSM test terminals.
During dedicated mode, RX level sub, RX quality sub and C/I reported by terminal are observed. C/I
value measured by the terminal is not available all the time in dedicated mode. For example, when
AMR speech codec is used, the terminal reports the LQE (Link Quality Estimate) value to the network.
During this time the C/I value reported by the terminal is not valid. Please note that all test terminals
do not report C/I value. Triggering points in dedicated mode are:

RX level sub and RX quality sub, OR RX level sub and C/I

These two combinations are observed all the time during the measurement to trigger interference
analysis. Analysis is based on TCH channel numbers if valid data is available, or BCCH if no TCH
channel data is found. If frequency hopping is used, C/I average value is used. The user can define
triggering limits via the Nemo Outdoor user interface. Default values are:

RX Level Sub is above or equal user-defined threshold (default value -90 dBm)

RX Quality Sub is above or equal user defined threshold (default value 4)

Channel average C/I is below or equal user defined threshold (default value 10 dB)

The following data is extracted from the terminal and written to the terminal measurement file:

Terminal serving channel number

or TCH channels in case of frequency hopping

2 00

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Cell ID

RX level sub

RX quality sub

C/I if available

For each terminal serving channel number X, the following data is extracted from scanner
measurements and written to terminal measurement file:

Channel number, RX level and BSIC for channel X

Channel number, RX level and BSIC for channel (X-1)

Channel number, RX level and BSIC for channel (X+1)

Results are written to IANALYSIS event and can be displayed in different views, for example, in a
table grid and bar graph. If BTS file is used also cell names for the serving and interfering cells can be
seen during the measurement and playback. Nemo Outdoor includes two predefined custom windows
for GSM interference analysis. Table grid and bar graph.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 01

BAND SCAN
With the Nemo FSR1 scanner you can perform band scanning. All specified channels are scanned for
the selected band and technology and the strongest measured identifiers (CDMA PN, EVDO PN,
WCDMA SC, LTE Cell ID) for every valid channel of that technology type are reported. Signal strength
and signal quality are reported for each identified channel. This feature is useful in areas where
broadcasted technologies and bands are unknown.
To start a band scan, right click the Nemo FSR1 item in the Devices view and select Band Scan.

Available technologies and bands supported by the scanner are shown under Scan settings. Please
note that only licensed technologies (systems) are shown.
Select the technologies and bands that you want to be scanned and define the threshold levels for the
parameters available. Finally press the Start Scan button. With the default threshold values it takes
approximately two minutes and 30 seconds to scan GSM 900, 1800 and WCDMA 2100 bands. The
scanning rate can be increased by adjusting the threshold values.

2 02

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Scanning results are displayed on the Scan results page. It is possible to save the results to a text file
(.csv).

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 03

TIMESLOT TESTING

This functionality is available for certain GSM and GSM/UMTS dual-mode mobiles only.
With Nemo Outdoor, it is possible to test the timeslots of any particular channel.
Select Measurement | <device name> | Timeslot Testing and the Timeslot Test Configuration dialog
will be opened.

Phone Number Used for Testing defines the test call number. This must be a valid number.
Run Test Until Completed option keeps the test running until all the timeslots have been tested.

Note that if you select the Run Test Until Completed option, the test may continue indefinitely.
Click the Stop Testing button to interrupt the timeslot test.
The Specify call duration option enables you to define a time in seconds that the call will last.

2 04

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

In the Channel Settings | BCCH channel you define the Channel (BCCH) that you want to test.
Timeslots used by BCCH refers to the timeslots that are used for system messaging and therefore
cannot be accessed with mobiles. Click on the button to enter the Select Channel dialog.

Save results to file defines whether the report is saved to a file


Save results to clipboard defines whether the report is saved on the clipboard after testing.

On the Test results page you can view the progress of the test. Selecting timeslots will exclude them
from the test, for example, in the case they are already reserved for data testing. Green color indicates
channels and their timeslots that have been called, and the number in the slot the number of calls
made in the timeslot. In the table you can see a list of all the TCHs of the selected channel and their
timeslots. There is a yellow frame around the timeslot that was accessed during the previous call.
Those white timeslots that were not tested will turn red. This happens, for example, if the user stops
the testing.
The Number of Call Attempts field tells how many calls have been made so far.
Click the Stop testing button to interrupt the timeslot test.
When there are no more white slots left, i.e. all time slots except for the ones that were excluded from
the test by selecting them (grey), the measurement will stop on its own.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 05

VIEWING GRAPHS
There are several types of graphs in Nemo Outdoor. There are some pre-made custom windows of
each graph type that offer easy access to relevant network parameters. See chapter Custom Windows
for opening custom windows. To open an empty graph, select Data | [graph type] | New.
It is possible to view selected parameters in graphs by drag and dropping them in it. Click on a
parameter in the Parameters view and drag and drop it on the graph. Move your mouse pointer on top
of a parameter in the Parameters view, and the tooltip will display more information about that
particular parameter.

2 06

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Parameters can also be opened for all devices at once and seen on different views. First, press down
the Ctrl button and select the devices by clicking on them in the Parameter tree. After this, right-click
on the wanted parameter from the parameter tree and select the graph type in which you want the
parameter to be opened.

The Parameters view contents can be filtered using the Parameters and Windows buttons. Clear the
Windows button, and all the custom windows will be hidden. Clear the Parameters button, and all
parameters will be hidden.
The options listed in the graph popup menu will be introduced next.

Graph Popup Menu


Right-click on the graph to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of the
graph.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 07

Custom Window Properties

In the Custom Window Properties dialog you can define the custom window name and select groups
for the custom windows. The custom window groups define which custom windows are available for
each device. For example, if you select LTE FDD, the custom window will only be available when an
LTE device is added to Nemo Outdoor or you are playing back an LTE measurement.

Save Custom Window Changes


Use the Save Custom Window Changes command to save changes made in the custom window.

Save as New Custom Window


Right-click on a graph window and select Save as New Custom Window from the popup menu. The
Custom Window Properties dialog is opened (see above). Type a name for the custom window and
define the custom window groups.

Save as Image
Use the Save as Image command to save the active view as a .jpg image.

Move View To
With the Move View To command you can move the active view to another view group. See chapter
View Groups for more information on view groups.

2 08

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Graph Properties
Right-click on a graph window and choose Properties from the popup menu to open the Graph
Properties dialog. You can also open it by clicking the Graph Properties dialog button
. Please
note that the contents of this dialog varies depending on the graph type (line, bar, scatter, spectrum).

Select Yes in the Show value labels field to view the parameter value as a numerical label above the
bar in the graph.
Value label placement defines wether the value is displayed on top of the bar or on the bar.
Axes define the parameter for the left and right axes in the bar graph. If you select Default, the axis
changes depending on the active layer. You can also define different parameters for the axes. This is
especially useful if you have two layers open and they have different scales.
Automatic bar scale option is available for bar graphs. When the option is set to Yes, the X-scale
automatically scales to the displayed data.
Select Yes in the Hide panels in full screen mode if you want panels to disappear once you enter full
screen mode.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 09

Edit Parameters
By selecting the Edit Parameters item in the menu you will enter the Edit Parameters dialog. Select
parameters in the Parameters tree and move them to the editing table with the right arrow button .
Remove a parameter from the table by selecting it and clicking the left arrow button

You can also quickly find parameters through the filter field. Use the up
to move the parameters in the editing field.

and down

arrow buttons

The parameters will be shown in the Values view in the Graph side panel. This functionality is
particularly useful for viewing textual parameters.

Side Panel
Right-click on a graph window and choose Side Panel from the popup menu. You can also open it by
clicking the Side Panel dialog button
.

Layers
Select Layers in the popup menu to view the Layers view in the graph side panel.

Values
Select Values in the popup menu to view the Values view in the graph side panel.

2 10

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Full Screen
Selecting the Full screen item in the popup menu will display Nemo Outdoor in full screen mode.

Zoom - Scatter Graph


To zoom in on a scatter graph, drag your mouse diagonally from either corner with the green dot
towards the corners with the red dots. To zoom out, do the same in reverse, dragging the mouse from
a red dot to a green dot.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 11

Graph Side Panel - Layers

The layers can be dragged and dropped on some toolbar buttons. For example, a layer can be
dragged and dropped on the Remove layer button
to remove the layer. The order of the layers can
also be changed by dragging them with the mouse.

The layer is now removed.

2 12

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

To create space in the graph side panel, you can also click on the X button in the right-hand corner of
the Layers view. To reopen the view, right-click on the graph and select Layers in the popup menu.
You can also change the order of the parameters in the graph by dragging them in the Layers view.

Right-click on the Layers view to view the Layers popup menu.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 13

Grouping Layers
The New Group, Rename Group, Remove Group, Move Group Up, Move Group Down and
Group Similar Layers items are used in editing and organizing layer groups. Layer groups can be
used to group parameters with the same unit and scale. Parameters in the same group will be
displayed in the same scales and the different groups will be stacked in the graph.

The Layers view displays all parameters added in the graph.

2 14

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Righ-click on the view and select Group Similar Layers.

The parameters will be organized into groups based on the parameter unit.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 15

Groups can be removed, renamed and moved up and down. You can also create a new group and
drag and drop parameters into the group.

New Layer
The New Layer command creates a new layer.

Select a parameter in the Y or X field. You can also assign the parameter into a layer group.
Define the layer properties, such as, line style and color. See chapter Layer Properties for more
detailed information. Click Add to add the new layer and Close to exit the dialog.

2 16

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Hide Layer
The Hide Layer button

hides the selected layer.

Remove Layer
The Remove Layer button

removes the selected layer.

Layer Properties
Click on the Layer Properties
icon to enter the Layer Properties dialog. The dialog can also be
accessed by double-clicking a layer in the panel. The Layer Properties dialog can be used to edit the
selected layer.

Line width defines the line thickness in pixels.


Show extended values list displays more detailed information about the parameter.
Stairs defines whether the line is drawn connecting two points using two lines (giving a "stairs"
appearance) or one straight line.
Sort(Y): Support for data sorting based on y-value in bar graph. Data can be sorted based on
descending or ascending order.
Draw as area defines whether the area below the line is filled .
Area transparency defines transparency value used in filling the area (0 = totally opaque, 100 =
totally transparent).
Averaging refers to whether moving average is used in drawing the line.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 17

There is an option to manually configure graph layer colors. This feature can be used with line and bar
graphs. The Color field determines whether the graph line is colored with a Classic (algorithmic) or
fixed color set, or whether a color set based on parameter values is used (see chapter Graph Layer
Color Configuration).
Window size defines the number of values to be averaged.
Automatic scale the minimum and maximum values of the scale are defined automatically based on
the minimum and maximum values visible on the screen.
Use value scale defaults: the minimum and maximum values of the scale can be defined by the user,
so the maximum and minimum values are not dependent on the values that are displayed. Note that if
you want to select No in the drop-down menu, Automatic scale also needs to be set to No.
Minimum defines the minimum value of the scale, if Automatic scale is set to No. If Automatic scale is
set to Yes, this is not used
Maximum defines the maximum value of the scale if Automatic scale is set to No. If Automatic scale is
set to Yes, this is not used.
Minimum and maximum threshold define the maximum and minimum values at which the userdefined limits for a measurement result is set. Horizontal lines help determine if the value goes below
or above the minimum and maximum values.
Depending on the parameter, it is possible to define various filters:

Channel: list of channels whose measurement values are shown (Ch = ch1 or ch2 or ch 3 or
AND Pilot 0 p1 or p2 or o3 or...). If the list is empty, no filtering is used

Pilot: list of channels and pilots whose measurement values are shown (Ch = ch1 or ch2 or ch 3
or AND Pilot 0 p1 or p2 or o3 or...). If the list is empty, appropriate filtering is not used so that it
is possible to filter only channels, only pilots or both

Frequency: list of frequencies whose measurement values are shown (Freq = f1 or f2 or f3 or);
if the list is empty, no filtering is used

TopN: only N best measurement results are shown based on a defined parameter. If 0, no filtering
is used

TopN(Y): Support for best TOP-N filtering based on y-value in line and bar graphs. E.g., only the
best two values can be seen in the line or bar graph

BottomN(y): This can be done by selecting number of topN and select sorting order. E.g., below
bottom three RX levels are shown.

Some of the graph types support data tips. Hover the mouse cursor over the graph line or bar. The
data tip will display information from that point of time.
Parameters with instantaneous values display points instead of a line in a graph. Such parameters
are, for example, RACH TX Power, RACH Preamble Step and RACH Preamble Count. Such graphs
include also the following layer properties.
Point style allows you to select among various icons such as a triangle or a cross to display the
instantaneous values in the graph
Point size defines the size of the points in pixels in the graph

2 18

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Point transparency defines the degree of point transparency.

Arrow Down/Up
The Arrow Down
and Arrow Up
icons will move the selected layer up or down in the graph
panel. You can also change the order of the parameters in the graph by dragging them in the Layers
view with the mouse.

Layer Device Selection


The Device Selection dialog enables you to view and reorganize layers by device. Layers can be
reorganized easily by simply dragging and dropping them from one device to another. The Device
Selection dialog is a convenient way to change a device for several layers at once instead of using
layer properties dialog for each layer separately.

Graph Side Panel Values & Parameter


The Values view shows the layer parameter values at a specific point during the measurement
defined by the position of the cursor in the graph window. Select a layer in the Layers view, and
double-click on any parameter in the Values view to view the parameter properties.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 19

If a given parameter value consists of more than one value, a separate parameter window, an
extended values list, appears.

In the example above, the Parameters view is organized into tabs to view more than one parameter
and its values. In this example the Ec/N0 (active) parameter is selected. You can also drag and drop
the Values and Parameter views inside, beside, above or below each other. For example, in the
example below the parameter view is embedded in the Values view.

2 20

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

In the example below all views are separate. By clicking the maximize icon
at the upper right-hand
corner of a view it is possible to maximize the view. Click the exit icon
at the top to close the view.
You can reopen the view by right-clicking on the graph and selecting Values.

By right-clicking on the Values view, you can access the Edit Parameters dialog.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 21

Graph Layer Color Configuration


Nemo Outdoor offers an option to manually configure graph layer colors. This feature can be used
with line and bar graphs, and is very useful when observing a certain parameter or parameters, as
different colors can be assigned e.g., to different channels, scrambling codes, cell ID, etc. First, add
parameters to the graph by dragging them from the parameter tree. Next, double-click on a layer in the
Layers side panel to enter the Layer Properties dialog.

If you select the Classic (algorithmic) option for coloring the graph, Nemo Outdoor will pick up the color
automatically.

2 22

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

If you choose Fixed color, click to enter the Colors dialog. Define the fixed color by selecting it in
the Standard or Custom page, or define the RGB for the color. Click OK. The graph will be colored
based on the fixed color you selected.

Selecting Color set in the Color method drop-down menu will activate the Color set parameter and
Color set fields.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 23

Select a parameter in the Color set parameter drop-down menu, and a color set in the Color set
drop-down menu. Note that only layer-specific parameters will be available in the Color set
parameter menu.
To edit the color set in question, click on Edit Color Set.. button. It will lead you to the Color Set
Properties dialog. Here you can edit the color set selected. See chapter Color Set Editor for more
information.

The parameter will be colored based on its values in the graph.

2 24

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

In the picture below you will see a bar graph colored based on BSIC numbers. Each BSIC is
presented with its own color; the channels without BSIC information appear in blue color.

Similarly, the picture below presents a bar graph where bars are colored based on BSIC numbers. All
channels with BSIC information appear in green color, and channels without BSIC information are
shown with black color.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 25

The example below shows a bar graph in which bars are colored based on channel numbers.

Spectrum Graphs
Spectrum graphs are useful for displaying spectrum scanning results.
By adding markers (vertical lines) on top of the window, it is possible to see the RX level for certain
frequencies shown on the side panel. Markers can be also edited, added or removed via edit marker
window.

2 26

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

With the peak value indicator tool you can visualize the peak value of the selected parameter for
each frequency. Open the Layer Properties dialog and select Yes in the Draw peak line field.

The peak value line will be drawn with the selected color. In the image below, the peak line is drawn in
red. To reset the peak line, right-click on the graph and select Reset Peak Lines.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 27

Color Grid Graphs


Color grid graphs can be used for visualizing data as a two-dimensional color grid where the X-axis
represents time and the Y-axis represents the identifier of the value to be plotted (channel, cell, etc.).
The Y-axis scale is configurable. Color of the cell in the X/Y position represents the value. Color grid
graphs are especially useful for displaying scanner data.

How to Read MIMO Parameters in Bar Graph Data View


In the bar below, graph CQI can be seen for both antenna ports. CQI for antenna port 0 is on the top
and bottom CQI value (CQI2) is for the second antenna port. For example, in the example below three
percentage of time (200ms) CQI value 6 has been used with antenna port 0 and CQI value 3 has been
used for antenna port 1. Bars are colored based on CQI type to indentify used CQI type. CQI type A is
shown in green and CQI type B is shown in red.

If more detailed information about the link adaptation is needed, it can be seen from the HSDPA link
adaptation information table grid. Distribution is shown for both antenna ports from the last sample
duration which is set to 200ms. E.g., four percentage of the time during the sample duration
modulation for antenna port 0 has been 16QAM with transport block size 14411 bits and for the
second antenna port 1 modulation was 16QAM with transport block size 12266 bits.

2 28

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 29

VIEWING GRIDS
Along with the graph windows, the grid tables offer you useful information about measurement events,
such as statistics from the current measurement, QoS parameters, Layer2 and Layer 3 messages (the
selection depends on the technology measured), and packet capture data. All events can be decoded
by double-clicking on the event row. The decoded message is displayed in a separate window.
Alternatively, you can right-click on an event row and from the popup menu select Decode Message.
To open several decoded message windows, select Decode Message in New Window option.
To view data in Packet decoder grids during playback, you need to enable the packet decoding
function in Device Settings
Measurement Properties | General | Advanced prior to performing
data measurements. Select Full or Partial in the Enable IP Capture field. A separate .pcap-file will be
generated for the measurement, and this file needs to accompany the measurement file in the same
folder when viewing and decoding packet capture information in Packet Decoder grids in Nemo
Outdoor. This requires Microsoft Network Monitor to be installed. Please see chapter IP Packet
Capturing for more information.
An empty grid table is opened by selecting Data | [Grid Type] | New. If you select one of the readymade custom windows and you have multiple devices connected to Nemo Outdoor, you need to select
which device(s) you would like to view in the grid from the Select Device(s) to View dialog. In most
grids you only view one device in a grid at a time. Open several grid windows to view multiple devices
at the same time. However, in the Parameters grids you can view several devices simultaneously as
separate columns.

You can also drag and drop parameters from the parameter tree into grids. Click on the parameter and
drag it in the grid. It will be added there.

2 30

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Find Function in Signaling Grid Based on Decoded Message


You can use the Find functionality in signaling grids to find message(s) with a specific string in its
decoded message. Select the grid view, press Ctrl + F, and type the search string in the Search
string field in the Find dialog. Depending on whether Up or Down direction is selected in the
Direction field, the event next in the time sequence will be highlighted in the grid.

Grid Popup Menu


Right-click on the grid to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of the grid.
Note that the contents of the menu vary depending on the grid type.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 31

Custom Window Properties

In the Custom Window Properties dialog you can define the custom window name and select groups
for the custom windows. The custom window groups define which custom windows are available for
each device. For example, if you select LTE FDD, the custom window will only be available when an
LTE device is added to Nemo Outdoor or you are playing back an LTE measurement.

Save Custom Window Changes


Use the Save Custom Window Changes command to save changes made in the custom window.

Save As New Custom Window


With Save As New Custom Window you can save a new custom window. Selecting this item will
open the Custom Window
Custom Window Properties dialog.

Move View To
With the Move View To command you can move the active view to another view group. See chapter
View Groups for more information on view groups.

Automatic Scrolling
Select the Automatic Scrolling option in order to make the grid view scroll as the measurement
progresses.

Add/Remove Separator
In Parameters grids you can add empty lines (separators) to make the view easier to read. Select
Remove Separator to delete an empty line from the grid.

2 32

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Open
Open allows you to open the selected parameter or statistic in another view (line graph, table grid,
map, etc.). This item is available only with parameters and statistics grids.

Grid Color Configuration in Events Grids


To make grids more clear, you can colorize certain events in a grid based on the event name or event
ID. Right-click on a grid, and select Configure Colors from the popup menu, or click on the
Configure Colors button in the Grid Properties dialog. The Grid Color Configuration dialog is
opened.

Note that not all events and parameters are available with all devices.
In the events Grid Color Configuration dialog select the Event name column. You can set a text
color and/or a background color for the selected events. If you want to colorize the background, select
Call events (Event name) in the Background Color Set field and select (none) in the Text Color Set
field. Alternatively, if you want to colorize only the text in the grid, select Call Events (Event name) in
the Text Color Set field from the drop-down menu and select (none) in the Background Color Set
field, as in the example below. Note that the contents of the Grid Color Configuration dialog depend
on which columns have been selected in the Grid Properties dialog.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 33

Click Edit to view the Color Set Properties dialog. Make sure that the color set type is string. Here
you can also add more strings to the color set through Add

In the String Properties dialog specify the name of the string in the Text field and select the color
code for it. If you want, you can also write a description for the string text in the Description field.

Click OK in the String Properties and Color Set Properties dialogs. Finally, click OK in the Grid
Color Configuration dialog. You can see color-coded events in the grid data view. Each color
corresponds to a certain type of event, defined in the Color Set Properties dialog.

2 34

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Grid Color Configuration Based on Decoded Message in Grids


Messages and Events grids can be color-coded based on a string in a messages decoded message.
In this case, you need to create a new color set in the Color Set Editor. It is possible to color-code both
the text in the grid and the background color. While you can choose to colorize only one of them, it is
also possible to color-code both text and background. For example, you can have a message appear
in white text and blue background color. However, in that case remember to create two new color sets
for the same string, for example, Decoded Text_1 and Decoded Text_2. Below you will see an
example of how to create a color set and set it for the background color. Click Add

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 35

In the Color Set Properties dialog type, for example, Decoded Text in the Name field. You can also
create a short name for the new color set, or write a description for it. Select string as the color set
type. Click Add In the String Properties dialog type in the string which will determine the messages
to be colored with the new color set.

2 36

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Click OK, and Close in the Color Set Editor.

Right-click on the grid and select Configure Colors. You can colorize the text color in the grid and/or
the background color. If you want to colorize only the text, select the new color set created above,
Decoded Text, in the Text Color Set field and select (none) in the Background Color Set field. In this
example the background will be color-coded, so (none) is selected in the Text Color Set field, and
Decoded Text in the Background Color Set field. Click OK.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 37

All messages with sysInfoType2 in its decoded message will be color-coded with the Decoded text
color set.

2 38

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Grid Color Configuration in Events Grids Based on Message Name


Messages in Events grids can also be color-coded based on the message name. You can color-code
the message text or the background color, or both. Color-coding a message based on its name is
done in the same way as color-coding a message based on a specific string in its decoded message.
However, when creating the new color set in the Color Set Editor | Color Set Properties | String
Properties, you need to type the name of the message you want to color-code instead of the string in
the decoded message. Below you will see an example of two color sets made for the same message
name. Further, both the message text and background will be colorized. Click OK.

Also click OK in the Color Set Properties and Color Set Editor dialogs.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 39

Next, right-click on the messages grid and select Configure Colors, or select Configure Colors in
the Grid Properties dialog. Select Message_2 in the Text Color Set field and Message in the
Background Color Set field. Click OK.

All messages called SYSTEM_INFORMATION_BCH will be color-coded with the new color sets.

2 40

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Grid Color Configuration for Parameter Grids


Grids can be made clearer through colors. Open a parameters grid from Data | Parameters Grid.

Right-click on the grid and select Configure Colors. In the Grid Color Configuration dialog click Use
Defaults if no default color sets are shown in the Color Set field. The Clear All button inactivates the
default color sets. Note that not all parameters have default color sets assigned to them. You can
choose a color set for a selected parameter in the Text Color Set and Background Color Set dropdown menus depending on whether you want to color the text/values or the background of the
text/values in the grid. If you want to set a color set for both text and color for the same parameter,
note that you need to use two different color sets for it.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 41

You can also edit the default color sets by selecting a color set and clicking Edit In the Color Set
Properties dialog you can change the default settings to the color set.

2 42

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Parameters with assigned color sets are colorized according to their value. In the example below a
background of the parameter values has been color-coded. Click OK twice to exit the Grid Color
Configuration dialog.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 43

Grid Color Configuration for Table Grids


Table grids have default color sets assigned to them. Go to Data | Table Grid | New. In the Grid
Properties dialog select a device and a parameter set to be viewed in the table grid. Click OK.

The parameters are colorized according to their default color sets. You can also edit the default color
sets. Right-click on the grid, select Configure Colors the parameter you wish to edit, and Edit
The Color Set Properties dialog appears where you can change the color set settings. Click OK to
exit the dialogs and go back to the table grid.

2 44

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

You can also view cell name information for missing neighbors when a scanner and a mobile are used
simultaneously.

Configure Filters/Quick Filter


Another method to organize Events grids is to use filters. By using filters, only the selected messages
will be displayed. Right-click on a grid view and select Configure Filters from the popup menu

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 45

The Grid Filter Configuration dialog is opened.

Select the Showing all option to display all events in the grid window as default. Select the Hiding all
option from the drop-down menu to hide all events in the grid window as default. If you would like to
view one or more messages of a selected type and hide others, select hiding all lines. If you would like
to hide one or more messages of a selected type and view others, select showing all lines.
You can add a filter rule for the grid by clicking on the plus
you options based on which the grid filtering takes place.

button. A conditional row appears giving

It is possible to set filtering rules for message name, subchannel and decoded text. In addition, you
can select a parameter in the Select Parameter dialog which you can access through the Other
Parameter item in the filter target popup menu.

2 46

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

The contents of the condition menu vary depending on which item in the filter target menu is selected.

Note also that a separate, independent condition needs to be added from the plus icon at the top
left-hand corner of the dialog. If a condition has two or more constituents, the plus icon next to the
first constituent needs to be clicked. In this case the conditions are indented and combined with one
another with the text and if, and both conditions need to be met for the filtering to take place.
In the example above, a line is filtered out if a message contains a missing neighbor ec/n0 value that
is less than -5. The second filtering rule states that if a message name contains the text
SYSTEM_INFORMATION_BCH and if a message contains SysInfoType18, the message is filtered
out from the grid.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 47

The minus icon


removes a row next to it from the list. Alternatively, you can delete all filters by rightclicking on a grid and selecting Quick Filter and Remove All Filters from the popup menu.
The Quick Filter menu offers a shortcut to defining filter rules for messages. Right-click on a row in the
grid and select Quick Filter from the popup menu.

You can now quickly define a filter for the selected layer message. You can choose to hide the
respective message and all similar messages either according to the Event (Hide this Event),
subchannel (Hide This Subchannel) or according to the message text (Hide This Message). All
messages with the selected event, subchannel name or message text will be hidden. In the same way,
you can choose to display messages of the selected type only. Select Remove All Filters to delete all
filter rules.
When filtering is enabled, the text Filtering will appear in the title bar.

Create Notification
Select the Create Notification item to create a new notification matching the selected event. For more
information, see chapter Notification Configuration.

Decode Message
This function will open the selected event row in a decoded form. You can also decode messages by
double-clicking on the message row.
In the message decoding grid you can use the Show Next Message
and Show Previous
Message
grid toolbar buttons to move to the previous/next message. If you move forward or back
in the message decoding grid, use the Go to Message
button to move to the same message in the
messages grid. Click the Copy to Clipboard
button to copy the contents of the message decoding
grid as text to clipboard.
With certain events such as cell measurement (CELLMEAS), it is also possible to arrange the contents
of the decoded message in three different ways.

2 48

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

The Format as list


arranges the contents of a grids measurement results in a list. The Format as
horizontal table
arranges the contents in the form of a horizontal table with columns, and the
Format as vertical table
arranges the contents in a vertical table. The search field in the decoded
text window enables the user to find a string in the decoded message window.

Select a string of text in the decoded text, right-click on it and select Copy to copy the selected text as
text to the clipboard. If no text is selected in the decoded text window, all text in it will be copied. This
is the same as the Copy to Clipboard
functionality.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 49

Decode Message in New Window


This function enables you to have several decoded message windows open at the same time.

Automatic Decode
The Automatic Decode function opens up a window which displays the currently selected or latest
message in decoded form.

Save - Grid

The Save command allows you to save a selected event row as a text file (.txt). If you select the
Decoded Text option, the decoded event text is saved in a text file. You can also save the entire grid
window as an image file (.jpg). From Events grids, you can export data into a MapInfo Tab-File or into
a CSV file.

2 50

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

MapInfo Tab-File Export


You can export measurement data into a MapInfo .tab file. In an Events grid, select Save | MapInfo
Tab-File. See chapter MapInfo Tab-File Export for more information.

CSV File Export


You can export measurement data into a CSV file. In an Events grid, select Save | CSV File..

The exporting is supported for a single file, and the column separator can be a comma, semicolon, tab
or space. The file(s) can be opened with third-party applications. Indoor files are not supported at the
moment. The user can select all events or only specific events from the grid for export.

Copy
The Copy command allows you to copy a selected event row and paste to another application as text
or as decoded text. If you select the Decoded Text option, the decoded event text is copied on the
clipboard. You can also copy the entire grid window as an image and paste to another application.

Select All
Through the Select All item you can select all events in an Events grid. This presents an easy and
quick way to select all lines, for example, to be exported.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 51

Find
The Find command allows you to search through the measurement file opened in the grid.

Type in the Search string field what you are looking for. Define if the search results should match
case and if the search should be applied to whole words only. You can also limit the search to
decoded messages only. The matches are highlighted in the grid one by one. To move down to the
next match, press F3. To move up to the next match, press Shift+F3.

The search field in the decoded text window enables the user to find a string in the decoded message
window.

2 52

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Below you will see a list of commands for the decoded text view.
Ctrl + Shift + F = Go to search field in decoded text view
Enter = Highlight next match in decoded text view (when search field is focused)
Shift + Enter = Highlight previous match in decoded text view (when search field is focused)
Esc = Clear search field in decoded text view (when search field is focused)

Full Screen
The Full Screen item enables you to view Nemo Outdoor in full screen mode.

Grid Properties
Right-click on a grid table and select Properties from the popup menu. The Grid Properties dialog is
opened.

Note that the appearance of the grid and the selection of parameters depend on the grid type
and on the measurement device.

You can select events, parameters, and statistics you would like to see in the grid table. The available
parameters/events are organized by technology and call mode in the All tab. If you select, for
example, the UMTS option, all the parameters/events under UMTS are selected. You can also select
individual parameters/events. Move your mouse pointer on top of a parameter/event, and the tooltip
will display more information about that particular parameter/event.
In the Selected tab you can view which parameters/events you have selected and change their order
using the arrow buttons.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 53

User Parameters
The User Parameters function allows you to specify parameters from layer messages that will be
automatically decoded and the values displayed in the Device Status window. Click the User
Parameters button in the Parameters dialog to access the Layer Parameters dialog.

Click the Add button to define new parameters.

Parameter name and Short name refer to the long and short name of the parameter to be decoded.
Search string is the string that is searched from the decoded layer messages, for example, Ordered
MS power level.
Layer defines the layer messages from where the string is searched.
After you have defined all the parameters, click OK. The new parameter is added to the list in the
Layer Parameters dialog. Click OK to exit the dialog. In the Parameters dialog, expand the User
Parameters item. Select the parameter you just defined and click OK.

2 54

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

The list of user parameters that you have defined are saved in a file called Parameters.xml.
User Parameters can be searched in messages grids. The user can also perform more complex
searches where the search key is split across multiple rows of data. It is possible, for example, to
search and display multiple results in a single Layer 3 message.

It is possible to export and import user parameters from and to Nemo Outdoor. See chapter
Export/Import Settings for more information.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 55

VIEWING MAPS
Nemo Outdoor supports two types of outdoor maps: MapX and OpenStreetMap maps. Most of the
functions are the same for both types but there are some differences.

Please note that in order to use OpenStreetMap maps, the computer needs to be connected to
the Internet or OpenStreetMap data must be downloaded on the computer.
Open a map by selecting Data | Map | New MapX or New OpenStreetMap. If you open a new MapX
map, Nemo Outdoor will open by default the map that you have entered in the Default Map field in the
User Interface Properties dialog, Paths tab. If you open an OpenStreetMap map, the view will center
on your current location.
The map window specific commands can be accessed through toolbar buttons as well as from the
popup menu when right-clicking on the map. See chapter Map Toolbar Buttons for a description of the
Nemo Outdoor map toolbar buttons.

Note that the Indoor map differs from the example below. For information on Indoor
measurements, refer to chapter Viewing Indoor Maps.

It is possible to view selected parameters on a map by drag and dropping them in it. Click on a
parameter in the Parameters view and drag and drop it on the map. Parameters can also be opened
for all devices at once and seen on different views. First, press down the Ctrl button and select the
devices by clicking on them in the parameter tree. After this, right-click on the parameter you wish to
view from the parameter tree and select Open in Map from the drop-down menu.

2 56

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

If you have a GPS receiver connected to the test system, the current location of the test vehicle will be
displayed on the map as a circle on the route. If there is no GPS connected to the system, you can
define the current location manually with the Set Current Location tool
(the button is activated
when recording is started). A new GPS event is created in the handler after which all location-specific
data, such as BTS cell names are displayed using the specified location.
You can observe the values of certain network parameters from the route coloring on the map. You
can define which color refers to which parameter value. This way it is easy to spot the problem areas
on a map.
While viewing notifications on a map, hovering above the notification icons will display a tooltip with
information such as cell name (if cell site file is used) and channel number.

Base Stations on a Map


If you select a BTS file (.nbf or .csv) for the measurement file, the base stations will be displayed. A
line will be drawn from the test vehicle to the serving base station. Also, the distance to the serving
base station is displayed in the status bar of the map window.

Note that the BTS file is displayed only if a device is associated with the BTS file (BTS
Properties Connected devices).
The BTS icons display the antennas, the channel numbers for the antennas, and directions that the
antennas point to. The antennas are drawn in one degree steps. Hover your mouse over the base
station icon to see more information about the BTS.

Note that if there are more than five cells in a BTS, the BTS name will be truncated with In
this case, click on the BTS icon to view the rest of the cells.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 57

Editing Base Station Files in Nemo Outdoor


It is possible to edit the locations of base station icons directly in Nemo Outdoor. Open a BTS file on a
map. Right-click on a BTS icon and select Move. Then click on the new location and the BTS icon is
moved there. You can also remove BTS sites from the BTS file. The changes are saved in the BTS file
when you exit Nemo Outdoor.

Right-click on a BTS icon and select Edit or right-click on the map and select Add Site. In the BTS
Editor you can edit the site and cell information. You can also add new sites, cells, and neighbor cells
by clicking the Add button.

For sites, you must define the following information: site name, longitude, and latitude.

2 58

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Under sites you have cells. For cells there are some mandatory and optional settings.

The settings below are mandatory.


System defines in which cellular system the cell belongs.
Cell name defines a unique name for the cell.Antenna direction defines the direction of the antenna
in degrees.
Channel number defines the channel number.
Cell ID/Cell ID 16-bit defines a unique cell ID for the cell.
Radio network controller ID defines a unique radio network controller ID for the cell.
Scrambling code defines a unique scrambling code for the cell.
The settings below are optional.
Antenna height defines the height of the antenna from the ground in meters.
Antenna tilt defines the angle of the main beam of the antenna relative to the horizontal plane.
Antenna beam width defines the width of the beam in degrees.
Cell range defines the range of the cell in kilometers.
For Cell type the options are undefined, normal, and repeater.
Location area code defines in which location area the cell belongs.
Routing area code defines in which routing area the cell belongs.
UTRAN registration area defines in which UTRAN registration area the cell belongs.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 59

MapX Maps
You can customize the MapX map view using the MapX properties. The customized settings can be
saved in a MapInfo Geoset file (.gst) and loaded later on. MapInfo Workspaces (*.wor file) cannot be
directly opened with MapX, but can be saved as a .gst file in MapInfo Professional using the MapInfo
MapX Geoset Utility tool (Geoset.mbx) that ships with version 5.x of MapInfo Professional. This file
(.gst) can be directly opened by MapX in Nemo Outdoor.
Each MapInfo raster map has two files: an image file (.tif. .gif, .jpg) and a .tab file When MapInfo
raster maps are used, the image file is the actual map image file. The .tab file contains information
about a map (such as location coordinates) and is used by Nemo Outdoor to refer to a particular map.
When using vector data for MapInfo, there are three different files that need to be in the same
directory, the .tab, .map, and the .id file. The corresponding image and .tab files for raster maps have
to be in the same folder in order to view a MapInfo map. If you are using a large map (size over 1
Mb), updating the map window will slow down Nemo Outdoor functions. We recommend you minimize
the map size by reducing the number of colors to 256 or 16, or turning the color map to black and
white.

MapInfo Tab-File Export


You can export measurement data into a MapInfo .tab file. In an Events grid, select Save | MapInfo
Tab-File. To export a route plan, create a route plan, right-click on the map and select Route Plan |
Save as MapInfo Tab-File.
The MapInfo Tab-File Export dialog displays a list of parameters or items that can be exported.
Select the items that you would like to include in the .tab file. Also define a File name and Layer title
for the exported .tab file.

2 60

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

To change the symbol for each parameter, double-click the parameter or select a parameter and click
the Change Symbol button. The symbol is used to draw the route in MapInfo. In the Symbol Style
dialog, you can select the symbol and define some effects and background color for it. Finally click
OK.

Click OK in the MapInfo Tab-File Export to save the .tab file.

Route Plans
Route plans are useful when you want to follow a certain route while performing a measurement. You
can create route plans automatically from a measurement in playback mode, or you can manually
create one with the Add waypoint functionality both during a measurement and during playback. In
addition, you can alter the route plans at any point through the control buttons in the Waypoints view in
the map side panel. You can save a route plan as a Route Plan File (.rpf), and if you have made any
changes to the route plan properties in the map window, you can save them as a custom window for
later use. The custom window will also contain changes made to the color set or Waypoints views.
If you have previously created and saved a route plan (.rpf), you can open it through the Open Route
Plan item in the map toolbar
or by right-clicking on the map and selecting Route Plan | Open from
the popup menu. The route plan (.rpf) is now viewed on the map and in the map side panel, and is
ready to be used in a measurement. By pressing Ctrl+A you can jump from one waypoint to the next.

Creating and Modifying Route Plans with Waypoints


Start Nemo Outdoor with at least one device and a GPS receiver attached to it in online or offline
mode. You can select a ready workspace in the Nemo Outdoor Welcome page (see Configuration
through Welcome page) as you start Nemo Outdoor and view a map window, or alternatively you can
open a map manually from Data | Map.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 61

You can create a route plan manually by clicking on the Add waypoint
button in the map toolbar,
or by selecting Add Waypoint in the map popup menu, and clicking on the map. The Add button at
the bottom of the Waypoints view in the side panel is also activated. A new route plan (.rpf) appears
in the Layers view, and the Waypoints view is enabled. You can save the route plan for later use by
clicking on the Save Route Plan
icon in the map toolbar or by selecting it in the map popup menu.

You can define waypoint-related settings in the Waypoint view in the side bar. The Show next
waypoint option should be selected when you want to view the next waypoint on the map during a
measurement. Note that the Show next waypoint functionality is only enabled in online or idle
mode, not during playback. The next waypoint is shown on the route as a big circle. If you clear the
Show next waypoint option, the Waypoint detection radius and Distance to next waypoint items
will also be disabled.
The Waypoint detection radius slider indicates at which distance (meters) the next waypoint is
selected. As you approach the next waypoint during a measurement, the next waypoint is selected on
the map when distance to it is smaller than the distance selected in the slide bar. The Distance to
next waypoint field indicates how many meters there still are to the next waypoint from the current
position on the route, so the figure decreases as you approach the next waypoint. The Distance from
previous waypoint field indicates how many meters it is from the previous waypoint from the current
position on the route. With the Next button you can move from one waypoint to the next.

2 62

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

You can make changes to the route plan using the buttons at the bottom of the Waypoints view.

To select a waypoint on the map, click on the Select button in the Waypoints view, then select a
waypoint on the map. This waypoint is shown as a bigger circle than the others. In addition, the delete
functionality is only enabled when the Select button is selected. If you click on Delete, the selected
waypoint on the route plan will be deleted, and the previous waypoint on the route will automatically be
selected and shown as a bigger circle. If the deleted waypoint was the first waypoint on the route plan,
the next waypoint on the route will be selected. Moreover, the Delete button is only enabled with the
Select button if there is more than one waypoint on the map. Reclick on Select to clear the
functionality.
You can move waypoints on the map by first clicking on Select, then selecting a specific waypoint on
the map. Click on the Move button, and you will be able to move the selected waypoint on the map.
The part of the route attached to the waypoint is moved with the waypoint. With the Reverse button
you can reverse the direction of the route plan.
The Add button in the Waypoints view in the side panel is synchronized with the Add waypoint
button in the map toolbar. If you click on either button when they are inactive, they will both be
activated, and conversely if you click on either button when active, they will become inactive. When
you select either, you are able to place new waypoints in the route plan.

Creating and Saving Route Plans from a Measurement


In addition to creating a route plan with waypoints, you can create a route plan from a measurement.
Start Nemo Outdoor, load a measurement file and open a map window. Right-click on the map and
select View Entire Route, or zoom in on the map to make sure the measurement contains GPS
coordinates. Create a route plan by clicking the Create Route Plan
toolbar icon, or select Route
Plan | Create from the map popup menu. The route plan should now be visible on the map, the layer
list should have a new layer (Untitled.rpf), and the control buttons on the Waypoints view should be
enabled. The route plan should closely follow the route from which it was created. Save the route plan
by clicking the Save Route Plan
item in the toolbar, or by selecting it in the map popup menu.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 63

You can also modify the route plan with the Select, Move, Add and Delete buttons at the bottom of
the Waypoints view in the side panel. Note that when you click on Select, you may need to zoom in on
the map to view the discrete waypoints. The selected waypoint will show as a bigger circle among all
the circles. See chapter Creating and Modifying Route Plans with Waypoints for more information on
how to use the control buttons, and on how to read the waypoints on the route plan during a
measurement.

Saving a Route Plan to a Custom Window


When you create a route plan and save it, the actual route plan will be saved as a Route Plan File
(.rpf). However, if you have made changes to the default map window and to the layer-specific
properties, and you want to save these changes, you need to save the map window as a custom
window. When you open a measurement the next time, you can open the custom window by rightclicking on the gray space outside the map window, and select Map | [name of custom window]. You
will also find the custom window in Data | Map | [name of custom window].
First, create or open a route plan, and save it. Next, double-click on the route plan in the map side
panel to access the Route Plan Properties dialog, change the properties and click OK. Change the
settings in the Waypoints view in the side panel, right-click on the map, and select Save As Custom
Window in the map popup menu. Close the map and open the custom window you saved. When you
open the properties dialog, the properties should be what you set them to.

2 64

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Map Popup Menu


Right-click on the map to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of the map.
Please note that the contents of the menu depend on the map type (MapX or OpenStreetMap).

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 65

Custom Window
Custom Window Properties

In the Custom Window Properties dialog you can define the custom window name and select groups
for the custom windows. The custom window groups define which custom windows are available for
each device. For example, if you select LTE FDD, the custom window will only be available when an
LTE device is added to Nemo Outdoor or you are playing back an LTE measurement.

Save as New Custom Window


Right-click on a graph window and select Save as New Custom Window from the popup menu. The
Custom Window Properties dialog is opened (see above). Type a name for the custom window and
define the custom window groups.

Save Changes
Use the Save Custom Window Changes command to save changes made in the custom window.

Save As
CSV File
Use the Save as Image command to export the active view into CSV format.

Image
Use the Save as Image command to save the active view as a .jpg image.

MapInfo Tab-file
Use the Save as MapInfo Tab-file command to export the active view into MapInfo format.

2 66

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Export to Google Earth


By clicking on the Export to Google Earth item you can export a map with measurement route, colors
based on selected parameter, notifications, and base station information to Google Earth .kml file
which can be viewed with the installed Google Earth application.

Move View To
With the Move View To command you can move the active view to another view group. See chapter
View Groups for more information on view groups.

Open Map
By selecting the Open Map item, you can open existing map files (.tab).

Save Map
By selecting the Save Map item, you can open the Save As dialog that you can use for saving the
map with another name.

Find Map at Position


When you right click on the map and select the Find Map at Position item, Nemo Outdoor will view a
list of possibly more detailed maps of the same location from the directory you have specified in the
View | User Interface Properties | Paths dialog. In this way you have the possibility to choose the
most appropriate map for your purposes. You can also browse for a suitable map manually by clicking
on the Browse button and browsing your local folders.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 67

Download Tiles
With the Download Tiles tool you can download OpenStreetMap data on your computer so you can
use the OpenStreetMap maps even when you are not connected to the Internet.

It is recommended to use this method always with OpenStreetMap maps as downloading map
data in the middle of measurements may affect the results.

Zoom levels defines the number of levels from which map data is downloaded. The more levels you
choose, the more data is downloaded.
Select the Reload existing tiles option to overwrite existing map data.
Click the Select Area button to the select an area with your mouse from where map data will be
downloaded.

Empty Disk Cache


Select the Empty Disk Cache option to delete all downloaded OpenStreetMap data. The tiles open on
the map will not be deleted.

Route Plan
Create
The Create Route Plan item creates a route plan from an open measurement in a map window.

Open
Through the Open Route Plan item you can open saved route plans to be viewed on a map.

Save
The Save Route Plan item will let you save the route plan as a Route Plan File (.rpf) for later use.

Save as MapInfo Tab-File


The Save Route Plan as MapInfo Tab-File item will let you save the route plan as a .tab file that can
be opened in MapInfo. See chapter MapInfo Tab-File Export for more information.

Add Waypoint
Activates the add waypoint functionality for creating route plans manually.

2 68

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Tool

Tool pull-down menu offers a selection of settings for configuring the window setup.
Arrow tool changes the cursor back to an arrow.
Pan tool changes the cursor into a hand that can scroll the map.
Center tool allows the map to be centered according to the cursor point.
Zoom In and Zoom Out tools change the cursor into a magnifying glass. You can also zoom in and
out using the mouse wheel and the + and - keyboard buttons.
Clear Route tool removes the measurement route from the map. Note that this command is activated
only during measurements. It cannot be used during playback.
Set Current Location tool defines the current location when no GPS data is available. Note that this
command is activated only during measurements and when no GPS is connected. It cannot be used
during playback.

Auto Center
The Auto Center tool pans the map so that the current location will stay on the visible area of the
map. Note that you cannot use the Pan and Center tools when the Auto Center command is
selected.

Auto Clear Route


The Auto Clear Route tool automatically removes the route from the map when measurement is
stopped. If you wish to keep the route on the map when starting a new measurement, unselect the
tool.

Previous View and View Entire Map


With the Previous View command, you can return to the previous map view, and the View Entire
Map command displays the whole map.

View Entire Route


By selecting the View Entire Route item you will be able to view the whole route on the map.

Scale
The Scale appears in the window when the respective selection is activated.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 69

Modify Route
With the Modify Route tool you can modify and reposition the measurement route in playback. This is
especially useful if there is a gap in the measurement route, for example, because GPS fix was lost in
a tunnel.
Right-click on a map and select Modify Route from the popup menu.

The route will be displayed as dots.

2 70

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Drag and drop the dots into their new positions. Please note that you should maintain the correct order
of the dots. Otherwise the route will appear jagged.

When you have finished modifying the route, right-click on the map and clear the Modify Route tool.
The modified route is now displayed in normal mode.

Add Site
With the Add Site tool you can edit and add new BTS sites on the map. Please see chapter Editing
Base Station Files in Nemo Outdoor for more information.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 71

Textual Comments
With the Textual Comments tool you can add textual comments on the map. Select Add Textual
Comment from the menu and type in the text box that appears on the map. The box can be
repositioned by dragging it on the map. To remove or edit individual comments, right-click on the text
box and select Remove or Edit. To remove all comments, right-click on the map and select Textual
Comments | Remove All Textual Comments.

Side Panels

Color Legends
The Color legends view shows the selected color set for a measurement route. If you have loaded a
multi measurement and added multiple routes with assigned color sets on the map, the color legends
will be shown in separate tabs. See chapter Color Set Editor on how to create and edit color sets.

2 72

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Find Cell
With Find Cell functionality you can search for a cell in a map window based on a parameter. Below a
cell is searched based on its Cell ID number. You can also search for custom data entered in the BTS
file header and for neighbor cells.

Layers

The Layers side panel displays a list of items available on the map. They can be BTS files,
measurement routes, map layers, route history search results, etc. Double-click an item to access its
Properties dialog (see Layer Properties). You can hide and display layers by selecting and
deselecting the option next to the layer or click the X button to delete the layer. With the buttons you
can add new layers on the map.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 73

Measure Distance
Use the Measure Distance tool to measure the distance between multiple points on a map. Click the
Measure Distance button
to activate the tool and click the Add point button. Select the points on
the map and the distance between these points is displayed on the map. The Total distance is
displayed in the left-hand panel.

With the Draw distance circle tool you can draw a circle where the distance between the last two
points is used as the radius.

To remove points from the map, click the Remove latest point or Remove all points buttons. To hide
the Measure Distance panel, click the Measure Distance button.

2 74

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Route History

If the Route History side panel is not visible, right-click on the map and select Side Panels | Route
History. With the Route History tool you can search for measurements recorded within a specified
time frame and plot those measurement routes on a map. This requires that a GPX file has been
created for the measurement. Define the folder from where GPX files will be searched and define the
time frame. After you click the Search button, Outdoor will search for the GPX files and display the
matching routes on the map.
The search results will also be displayed as layers. Double-click the route history layer to open the
Route History Route Properties dialog where you can edit the route color and thickness.

Waypoints
The waypoints item will activate the free route planning functionality on the map. You can create and
save a route plan for later use. The Show next waypoint field is only activated when at least one
device and one GPS receiver are attached to Nemo Outdoor in online or offline mode. This
functionality is not active during measurement playback. See chapter Creating and Modifying Route
Plans with Waypoints for more information.

Full Screen
Selecting the Full screen item will display Nemo Outdoor in full screen mode.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 75

Layer Properties
The dialog appearing when you click on the Layer Properties item depends on the layer selected in
the map side panel. It is possible to view three different kinds of layers in the side panel: the devicespecific measurement route layer, the base station layer, and the route plan layer.

Route Properties
When a measurement route is selected in the side panel and you right-click on the map and select
Layer Properties, the Route Properties dialog appears. You can also access this dialog by doubleclicking on the device-specific route layer in the side-panel.

In the case of multi measurements, you need to select a device in the drop-down menu on the Device
page.
Select the Show Device Label next to route option to display the device name at the starting point of
the measurement route.
By clicking on the MapX Properties button you will enter the MapX Properties dialog.

2 76

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

In the Route page you can define route line specific settings.
The Line thickness field allows you to define the thickness of the route in pixels.
The X offset and Y offset fields allow you to move the route on the map in x and y directions. To
define a default offset between multi-measurement routes, go to the Map Properties dialog.
With the Show parameter next to route option you can display a selected parameter value in
numerical format next to the route. Select the parameter and define the text and background colors.
Select the Show active cell information option to display active cell information and direction.
The Draw as dots item enables you to view the measurement route in dots instead of a line. If the
Draw as dots item is selected, the Dot size field appears and allows you to define the dot size in
pixels.
If you select the Draw thicker line when using high band option, the route will be drawn thicker
when the device is using the 1800/1900 band.
When the Draw during pause option is deselected, the route is not drawn during when measurement
is in pause.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 77

On the Color page you can define route-specific line coloring.


Use default color defines a single color for the measurement route. The entire route is drawn with the
same color.
If you would like to colorize the route based on parameter values, select the Use color set option.
First, select the Parameter for which you would like to define colors. Then select a matching color set
in the Color set field or select New to create a new color set. Click the Edit Color Set button to
access the Color Set Editor dialog.

Please note that even if you are using a color set to colorize the measurement route, the route
will be drawn with the default color if the selected parameter does not have valid values.
Therefore it is best not to use the default color in the color set.

2 78

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

If you are measuring with a scanner, click on Configure Filters to select specific channels,
frequencies, or scrambling codes for which the parameter values are displayed.
To filter spectrum scanning results, please define the frequency exactly in the same format as it
appears in the Spectrum graph.

To select scrambling codes, first select a channel by clicking the Select button under Selected
channel numbers. Then select scrambling codes for the selected channel by clicking the Select
button under Selected scrambling codes.

If you would like to use averaging in drawing the route, select the Trend line option and select from
the Number of previous values field how many values will be included in the average value.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 79

When the Hide route line on invalid value is selected, the default color is not drawn. For example, if
the route is colored based on Ec/No but the terminal is using GSM, the system route is not drawn
while in GSM.

On the Notifications page select the Show notifications option to view notification icons on the map.
You can also define the notification icon size in pixels.

The Base stations page displays information on the open BTS files on the map.
Connected BTS File refers to the BTS file that is used in connection with the map. Select a BTS file
by clicking the Add BTS File button in the map side panel.
Select the Draw line to active base station option to draw a line from the serving BTS to the test
vehicle. Define also the line Thickness and Color.
Select the Draw line(s) to neighbor cell(s) option to draw a line from the neighboring cells to the test
vehicle. Define also the line Thickness and Color.
Select the Draw only to active system cell(s) option if you only want to draw a line from active
system cell(s) to the test vehicle.

2 80

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Select the Draw only to n strongest neighbor cells option to draw a line to a defined maximum
number of strongest neighbors (per system) based on the following parameters:

GSM: RX Level Sub (if available) or RX Level Full

UMTS: Ec/N0

CDMA/EVDO: Ec/Io

LTE: RSRP

Select the Draw line(s) to detected neighbor cell(s) option to draw a line from the detected
neighboring cells to the test vehicle. Define also the line Thickness and Color.
Select the Draw line(s) to missing neighbor cell(s) option to draw a line from the missing
neighboring cells to the test vehicle. Define also the line Thickness and Color. Please note that lines
to missing neighbor cell(s) are drawn only when measuring with a mobile and a scanner. If missing
neighbor detection is performed using a scanner only, this information is not shown on the map.
Instead, the missing neighbor information can be viewed in a table grid.
Select the Draw line(s) to interferer cell(s) option to draw a line from interferer cells to the test
vehicle. Define also the line Thickness and Color. Please note that a BTS file must be used with this
feature. GSM interfering analysis results (IANALYSIS event) are written to the terminal output file and
due to this reason, the interfering cells can be seen on a map only when a BTS file is used with the
terminal.

By selecting the Show Textual notes option on the Textual notes page, you will be able to view
textual notes on a measurement route in the map window. You can select a text and background color
for the note in the Text color and Background color fields.

Click OK to exit the Route Properties dialog.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 81

BTS Properties
When a base station file is selected in the map side panel, the BTS Properties dialog appears when
Layer Properties is selected in the map popup menu. You can also view the dialog by double-clicking
on the BTS file in the map side panel.

BTS file refers to the BTS file that is used on the map.
If you have a BTS file that contains base stations from several systems (e.g., UMTS and GSM), select
the Draw only active system base stations option to display only base stations from the active
system, in other words, the system in which the test device is currently. The other base stations are
hidden.
Define also the size and color of the BTS icons. Note that you define a different color for active system
base stations and for other base stations. The Selected BTS cell color refers to neighbor cells that
can be highlighted on the map if neighbor information is defined in a BTS file. Neighboring cells are
highlighted with the selected color and the selected cell is shown with the same color but also with a
bolded outline. The tooltip shows neighbor cell names for the selected cell.

2 82

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Select the Use color set to color BTS icons when you want to distinguish between different base
stations through the use of existing and user-defined color sets.
Select a parameter from the Parameter drop-down menu based on which you want to color base
stations, and a color set in the Color set drop-down menu.
Clicking on the Edit Color Set button will lead to the Color Set Editor dialog where you can edit
existing color sets or create a new one to suit your needs.

See chapter Color Set Editor for more information on how to edit and create color sets.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 83

On the Cell info page you can choose what information is displayed from each base station.

Select the Show labels option to display a label or a description next to the selected cell information
and define the Text color and Background color.
In the example below, all cell information and the Show labels option are selected.

2 84

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

The Cell Range page enables you to view cell range on the map. Define the degree of cell range
transparency in the Cell Range transparency slide bar.

The Connected Devices page displays a list of devices that you can connect to the base station sites.
Note that the BTS sites will not be drawn if no device is selected.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 85

Route Plan Properties


When a route plan is selected in the side panel and you right-click on the map and select Layer
Properties, the Route Plan Properties dialog appears. You can also view the dialog by doubleclicking on the route plan in the map side panel.

Route plan file field defines the name of the route plan you selected in the map side panel.
The Waypoint properties field allows you to define the color for the waypoint icon and the line
attaching the icons together. You can also define the icon size and line thickness in pixels.
The X offset and Y offset fields allow you to move the route plan on the map in x and y directions.

Map Properties

In the Map Properties dialog you can define the offset (in pixels) between routes on a map. This
value is used with multi measurements where you have multiple routes which, without offset, would
overlap each other. You can also disable the default offset completely. To define offset values for
individual routes, go to the Route Properties dialog and define the X and Y offset values.

2 86

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

MapX Properties
Click the MapX Properties button to define some MapX specific properties. Note that these settings
differ according to the map provider. These settings can be saved in a MapInfo Geoset file by clicking
the Save Map button in the Map window. To later open the .gst file, click the Open Map button, select
MapInfo Geoset file in the Files of Type listbox, and select a file from the list.

If you are using MapInfo maps, you can define the appearance of the map even further by clicking
the MapX Properties button in the Route Properties dialog. In the Layers tab the table shows a list of
the current layers. The order on the list defines the order in which the layers are displayed on a map;
for example, in this case the Route layer is on the top, Current Position layer is under that, and World
map is at the bottom. This utility is useful if you want to have a bigger map on the bottom (e.g., a map
of Europe) and a more detailed map of a smaller area (e.g., of Helsinki) on top of that. To add layers
on the map click Add. An Open dialog is opened where you can choose the map you want to add as a
layer. The map is added on the list and with the Up and Down you can change the maps position on
the list. By selecting and clearing the Visible option you can decide whether or not to display the layer
on the map. To remove layers from the map, select the layer from the list and click the Remove
button.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 87

Color Set Editor


You can access the Color Set Editor by clicking the Edit Color Set button in the Route Properties |
Color dialog. You can also access the Color Set Editor by selecting View | Color Set Editor.., or by
double-clicking Color sets in the Configuration Manager (Ctrl+ M). With the Color Set Editor you can
define and name color sets to be used in maps and grids. In the Color Set Editor dialog you will see a
list of all existing color sets. You can sort the color sets by selecting the Type. You can also search for
a color set by its name. To edit an existing color set, double-click on the color set.

2 88

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

In the Color Set Properties dialog you can edit the settings for each color set.

Name and Short name identify the color set.


You can also type a description of the color set in the Description field.
Type defines what kind of data the color set is used with, numerical, gradient, string, or automatic. T
The Groups and Type settings can be used to sort the color sets in the Color Set Editor dialog.
With the Automatically generate missing values option you can specify colors for some fixed values
while the rest are automatically generated. This option can be used with numerical or string type of
colorset. This is especially useful with parameters with many values (e.g. PNs and scr. code).
Values table displays the different value ranges and the colors associated with them.
Click the Add button to define the colors and limits. In the Range Properties dialog, select the color
and then the upper and lower limits of the value range. You can also write a description for the value
range. Finally click OK.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 89

Click the Add Range button to quickly assign colors to parameter values. In the Add Range dialog,
define the top and bottom values and the step, i.e., how many values are represented by the same
color. Finally click OK and Nemo Outdoor will automatically assign colors for the parameter values.

2 90

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Map Example 1
In the map below, the measurement route is colored using the Active set size color set.
In the Route Properties | Route dialog, Color page, select Number of TBF-s Uplink in the Parameter
field, and Active set size in the Color Set field, and click OK. The Color Legend in the map side panel
displays the color codes for the Active set size values.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 91

Map Example 2
In the map below, the measurement route is colored using the TX Power color set. In the
Measurement's Route Properties dialog, Color page, select TX Power in the Parameter and Color
Set fields and click OK. The Color Legend in the map side panel displays the color codes for the TX
Power values. In this color set, green means a low TX Power level and red a high level.

2 92

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Map Example 3
In the map below, the measurement route is colored using the EcN0 color set. Base station icons are
displayed and a red line is drawn to the serving base station and a blue line to the neighbor stations.
In the Layer view in the map side panel, click on Add BTS File, or right-click on the measurement
layer and select Add BTS File. Right-click on the measurement layer in the map side panel again, and
select Properties | Base stations. Select the Draw line to active base station, and Draw line(s) to
neighbor cell(s) options. On the Color page, select the Use color set option, select Ec/N0 (Active) in
the Parameter field, and EcN0 in the Color set field. Click OK. The Color Legend in the side panel
displays the color codes for the EcNo values.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 93

Map Example 4
In the map below, the same measurement route is drawn twice on the map. The route with the blue
current location symbol is colored using the Ec/N0 color set, and the route with the black current
location symbol is colored using the MS Power Level color set.
In the Layers view click the Add Route button, or right-click on the existing measurement layer and
select Add Route. Select a device from the Route Properties | Device page, and now there should
be two measurements in the Layers view in the side panel. Right-click on the first measurement route
and select Properties. On the Route Properties | Color page, select the Use color set option, and
Ec/N0(active) in the Parameter field, and Ec/N0 in the Color set field. Click OK.
Next, right-click on the second measurement in the Layers view, and select Properties. In the Route
Properties | Color page, select the Use color set option, and MS Power Level in the Parameter field,
and MS Power Level in the Color set field. Click OK.
You will see the two adjacent routes colored with the above-mentioned color sets on the map. In
addition, you will see the measurements in the Layers view, and their color sets in the Color legends
view in the map side panel.

2 94

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Map Example 5
It is possible to export a map with measurement route, colors based on selected parameter, parameter
values, notifications, and base station information to Google Earth .kml file. The Google Earth
application needs to be installed for viewing the file.
Click on the Export to Google Earth toolbar button

in the map window.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 95

A Save As dialog appears. Select a destination for the saved .kml file in the Save in field, and type a
name for the map to be exported in the File name field. Click Save.

Go to the file destination and double-click on the saved file to open it. Note that you must have Google
Earth installed on your laptop to view the file.

The route and cell information are visible on the Google Earth map.

2 96

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Map Example 6
With scanner measurements, it is possible to view parameter values for a specific channel or
scrambling code on a map. In this example we will view RX level values for a selected channel.
First open a scanner measurement on a map.

Right-click on the route layer in the Layers view and select Properties.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 97

On the Route Properties, Color page, select Use color set. Select RX level in the Parameter field.
The corresponding color set is selected automatically.

Click on Configure Filters. In the Select Channels dialog, first click Remove All and then select one
channel by double-clicking on the channel in the Available list. Click OK and OK.

2 98

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

The route now displays the RX level values for the selected channel.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

2 99

VIEWING INDOOR MAPS


Open an indoor map by selecting Data | Indoor | New and click the Open Map button. The supported
indoor map types are MapInfo, iBwave, and Google Earth maps (.kmz).
Please refer to Google Earth documentation on how to create KMZ files. To view measurement data
on KMZ maps, select Data | Indoor | New. Change the file type to Google Earth Files (.kmz). Select
a map file and click Open. KMZ and MapInfo maps have the same functionalities. For more
information on iBwave files, please see chapter iBwave Maps.
It is possible to view selected parameters on an indoor map by drag and dropping them in it. Click on a
parameter in the Parameters view and drag and drop it on the graph. Parameters can also be opened
for all devices at once and seen on different views. First, press down the Ctrl button and select the
devices by clicking on them in the parameter tree. After this, right-click on the parameter you wish to
view from the parameter tree and select Open in Indoor from the drop-down menu.

3 00

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

To view a route on the floorplan you must have a marker file (.mrk) attached to the measurement file
(.nmf). To move the markers on the map, select a marker in the Markers | Index field, click on Move
and select a new destination for the marker.

On the map you can view, for example, a floorplan of the test site. While you are performing the
measurement and walking around in the building, use the markers to draw the measurement route on
the floor plan. You can observe the values of certain network parameters from the route coloring on
the map. You can define which color refers to which parameter value. This way it is easy to spot the
problem areas on a map. Map layers can be saved to .gst file and also as a custom window.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

3 01

Floorplans and BTS Files


You can also use BTS files on indoor maps. Open a route on an indoor map. Click the Add BTS File
button and browse for a BTS file.

After the BTS file is loaded, select a device that will be connected with the BTS file. Click OK.

3 02

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

The BTS icons will appear on the map and when the measurement file is played back, a line is drawn
from the test device to the serving base station.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

3 03

Multiple Routes and Floorplans


You can also view more than one route on a floorplan. Click on Add Route in the Layers view in the
side panel to add a route, and go through the steps mentioned above.
The floorplan below has three routes, two with parameter-based coloring and one with a default color.
When more than one route with parameter-based coloring exists, you can switch between the color
legends in the Color legends side panel.

You can load multiple floorplans in the indoor map by clicking on the Add Floorplan button in the
Layers view. This makes it possible for you to have, for example, indoor maps of different floors on
the same building at once. You can switch between the different floorplans through the Go
Downstairs and Go Upstairs buttons.

3 04

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Indoor Route Planning


Prior to conducting indoor measurements, you can plan the route in the indoor map window. You can
create a route plan manually by clicking on the Add waypoint
button in the map toolbar, and
clicking on the map. The Add button at the bottom of the Waypoints view in the side panel is also
activated. A new route plan (.rpf) is viewed in the Layers view. You can save the route plan for later
use by clicking on the Save Route Plan
icon in the map toolbar or by selecting it in the map popup
menu.

The route planning functionality with indoor measurements works in the same way as with outdoor
maps. See chapter Route Plans for more information.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

3 05

iBwave Maps
iBwave indoor maps can be viewed in Nemo Outdoor. Please refer to iBwave documentation on how
to create iBwave maps that can be imported to Nemo Outdoor.

Please note that when creating .ibwc maps, the projection should be in Lat/Lon format.
To view measurement data on iBwave maps, select Data | Indoor | New. Change the file type to
iBwave Design Files. Select an iBwave map file and click Open.

If the map file contains several building, choose one of them and click OK.

3 06

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

The map is opened. With the Go Downstairs and Go Upstairs buttons you can move the view
between floors. From the Layers list you can hide and displays the different floors and the BTS files for
each floor.

Nemo Outdoor will not automatically place the measurement route on the correct floor. Therefore,
when making measurements on several floors, it is adviced to make a separate log file for each floor
and, for example, include the floor number in the measurement file name. Alternatively, you can add a
textual note in the log file identifying the floor number in question. This way you will be able to place
the measurement route on the correct floor when playing back the log file.

BTS Files on iBwave Maps


You can also view BTS sites on iBwave maps. An iBwave map file contains, by default, BTS sites but
you will also need a separate BTS file (.nbf or .csv) that has the same BTS sites with matching cell IDs
than the iBwave file. Without the .nbf/csv file, BTS cell information and antenna directions will not be
displayed.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

First open an iBwave map and click the Add BTS File button to open the BTS file.

Select the BTS file and then select the device connected with the map. Click OK.

3 07

3 08

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

The BTS file appears in the Layers panel but to make it appear on the map, you will need to associate
it with the iBwave BTS file. To do this, right-click one of the iBwave BTS layers and select Properties.

On the Linked BTS page, select the file that you opened on the map and click OK.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

The BTS sites and cell information are now displayed on the map.

3 09

3 10

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Indoor Map Popup Menu


Right-click on the floorplan to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of the
map.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

3 11

Custom Window
Custom Window Properties

In the Custom Window Properties dialog you can define the custom window name and select groups
for the custom windows. The custom window groups define which custom windows are available for
each device. For example, if you select LTE FDD, the custom window will only be available when an
LTE device is added to Nemo Outdoor or you are playing back an LTE measurement.

Save Changes
Use the Save Changes command to save changes made in the custom window.

Save as New Custom Window


Right-click on a graph window and select Save as New Custom Window from the popup menu. The
Custom Window Properties dialog is opened (see above). Type a name for the custom window and
define the custom window groups.

Save As
CSV File
Use the Save as CSV File command to export the active view into CSV format. See chapter CSV File
Export for more information.

Image
Use the Save as Image command to save the active view as a .jpg image.

MapInfo Tab-File
Use the Save as MapInfo Tab-File command to export the active view into MapInfo format. See
chapter MapInfo Tab-File Export for more information.

3 12

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Move View To
With the Move View To command you can move the active view to another view group. See chapter
View Groups for more information on view groups.

Open Map
By selecting the Open Map item, you can open existing map files (.tab).

Save Map
By selecting the Save Map item, you can open the Save As dialog that you can use for saving the
map with another name.

Import Map
You can import your own bitmap files to Nemo Outdoor and use them as indoor maps. Click the
Import Map button in the map toolbar or select Import Map from the Data | Indoor menu. Select an
image file and click Open. The Map Import Parameters dialog is opened.

In order for the map and route drawing to function correctly, you need to georegister the image file or
enter the exact dimensions of the map area.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

3 13

To use georegistration, select Georegister and click OK. The image file will appear on the
Georegister Image map as a transparent box.

Adjust the location, width, height, and rotation of the image so that the image overlaps the right spot
on the map. Move the mouse cursor on top of the image so that the cursor changes into an
arrow/hand symbol and left-click with your mouse. Now you can move the image on the map. To move
the map beneath the image, move mouse cursor on the map so that the cursor changes into an
arrow/hand symbol and left-click with your mouse. Finally click OK to save the coordinates.

Route Plan
Create
The Create Route Plan item creates a route plan from an open measurement in an indoor map
window, after which you can save the route plan.

Open
Through the Open Route Plan item you can open saved route plans to be viewed on an indoor map.

Save
The Save Route Plan item will let you save the route plan as a Route Plan File (.rpf) for later use.

3 14

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Save as MapInfo Tab-File


Use the Save as MapInfo Tab-File command to export the active view into MapInfo format. See
chapter MapInfo Tab-File Export for more information.

Add Waypoints
Activates the add waypoint functionality for creating route plans manually.

Tool

The Tool pull-down menu offers a selection of settings for configuring the window setup. With the Add
Marker command you can add markers in the measurement file. The Arrow selection changes the
cursor back to an arrow. The Pan selection changes the cursor into a hand that can scroll the map.
The Center selection allows the map to be centered according to the cursor point. The Zoom In and
Zoom Out selections change the cursor into a magnifying glass. You can also zoom in and out using
the mouse wheel. The Clear Route command removes the measurement route from the map. Note
that this command is activated only during measurements. It cannot be used during playback.

Center on New Marker


The Center on New Marker option defines whether the indoor view is centered on a marker when it is
inserted.

Auto Center
The Auto Center tool for MapInfo pans the map so that the current location will stay on the visible
area of the map. Note that you cannot use the Pan and Center tools when the Auto Center command
is selected.

View Entire Map


The View Entire Map command displays the whole map.

View Entire Route


The View Entire Route command displays the whole route.

Textual Comments
With the Textual Comments tool you can add textual comments on the map. Select Add Textual
Comment from the menu and type in the text box that appears on the map. The box can be
repositioned by dragging it on the map. To remove or edit individual comments, right-click on the text
box and select Remove or Edit. To remove all comments, right-click on the map and select Textual
Comments | Remove All Textual Comments.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

3 15

Add Site
With the Add Site tool you can edit and add new BTS sites on the map. Please see chapter Editing
Base Station Files in Nemo Outdoor for more information.

Show Minimap
With the Show Minimap command you can view and hide the Minimap in the Indoor window. Minimap
displays a miniature version of the map and the current location is highlighted with a red square.

Show Marker Info


Show marker info hides or displays markers inserted into the measurement file.

Show Waypoints
The waypoints item will activate the free route planning functionality on the map. You can create and
save a route plan for later use. See chapter Creating and Modifying Route Plans with Waypoints for
more information.

Show Markers
Show Markers hides or displays markers on a map.

Show Layers
Selecting the Show Layers item in the popup menu will display the Layers view in the side panel.

Color Legend
Color Legend displays the name of the selected Color Set on the map window.

Full Screen
Full Screen switches the Indoor map view to full screen. Close the full screen view by clicking on
Close Full Screen in the popup window that appears.

3 16

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Route Properties Indoor Map


In the Route Properties dialog, you can define map-related settings.

Device defines the device that is being viewed on the map.


Click the MapX Properties button to define some MapX specific properties. Note that these settings
differ according to the map provider. These settings can be saved in a MapInfo Geoset file by clicking
the Save Map button in the Map window.

In the Route page you can define route line specific settings.

DUR ING MEASUREMENT S

3 17

The Line thickness field allows you to define the thickness of the route in pixels.
The X offset and Y offset fields allow you to move the route on the map in x and y directions. To
define a default offset between multi-measurement routes, go to the Indoor Properties dialog.
With the Show parameter next to route option you can display a selected parameter value in
numerical format next to the route. Select the parameter and define the text and background colors.
Select the Show active cell information option to display active cell information and direction.
The Draw as dots item enables you to view the measurement route in dots instead of a line. If the
Draw as dots item is selected, the Dot size field appears and allows you to define the dot size in
pixels.
When the Draw during pause option is deselected, the route is not drawn when measurement is
paused.

Use default color defines a single color for the measurement route. The entire route is drawn with the
same color.
If you would like to colorize the route based on parameter values, select the Use color set button.
First, select the Parameter for which you would like to define colors. Then select a matching color set
in the Color set field or select New to create a new color set. Click the Edit Color Set button to
access the Color Set Editor dialog. See chapter Color Set Editor for more information on defining
color sets.
If you would like to use averaging in drawing the route, select the Trend line option and select from
the Number of previous values field how many values will be included in the average value.
When the Hide route line on invalid value is selected, the default color is not drawn. For example, if
the route is colored based Ec/No but the terminal is using GSM, the route is not drawn while in GSM.

3 18

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Please note that even if you are using a color set to colorize the measurement route, the route
will be drawn with the default color if the selected parameter does not have valid values.
Therefore it is best not to use the default color in the color set.

Selecting the Show notifications option will view notifications on the indoor map. You can define the
size of the notifications in pixels in the Size field.

Indoor Properties

In the Indoor Properties dialog you can define the offset (in pixels) between routes on an indoor map.
This value is used with multi measurements where you have multiple routes which, without offset,
would overlap each other. You can also disable the default offset completely. To define offset values
for individual routes, go to the Route Properties dialog and define the X and Y offset values.

END ING MEASUREMENT S

3 19

EXPORT/IMPORT SETTINGS
It is possible to export and import various settings and measurement lists from and to Nemo Outdoor.
This function can also be used to send configurations remotely to Nemo Outdoor from an (S)FTP
server.

Export Settings to File


1. To export settings to a file, go to File | Export Settings | To File in Nemo Outdoor. Define a name
for the .aex file on your PC. The exported settings will be saved in this file.

2. Next, the Export Settings dialog appears. Select the items you wish to export, and click OK.

3. The selected items are now saved in the .aex file.

3 20

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Export Settings to FTP Server


1. To export settings to an FTP server, go to File | Export Settings | To FTP Server in Nemo
Outdoor. Define a name for the .aex file on your PC. The exported settings will be saved in this
file.

2. Click the FTP Options button to define settings for the FTP server. See page 330 for more
information on the settings.
3. Next, the Export Settings dialog appears. Select the items you wish to export, and click OK.

4. The selected items are now saved in the .aex file and exported to the FTP server. The exported
settings can now be downloaded from the FTP server to any Nemo Outdoor unit with access to
the server.

END ING MEASUREMENT S

3 21

Import Settings from File


1. To import settings, select File | Import Settings | From File in Nemo Outdoor. Select the file and
click Open.

2. Select the settings you wish to import in the Import Settings dialog.

3. Click OK. The selected settings and files are now saved in Nemo Outdoor and they can be taken
into use.

3 22

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Import Settings from FTP Server


1. To import settings from an FTP server, select File | Import Settings | From FTP Server in Nemo
Outdoor. If you have not defined any FTP server settings, the list will be empty. When FTP server
settings are defined, a list of exported setting files will appear.

2. Select the user parameters you wish to import in the Import Settings dialog.

3. Click OK. The selected settings and files are now saved in Nemo Outdoor and they can be taken
into use.

END ING MEASUREMENT S

3 23

ENDING MEASUREMENTS
The measurement is being recorded when a REC text appears in the upper right corner of the main
window. Follow these instructions to stop the measurement.

To end the measurements:


1. If you are using a script to perform the measurement, you can either wait until the script file has
been executed or interrupt the script either by selecting Measurement | Stop Script or by clicking
the Stop button
on the toolbar.
2. If you are performing measurements manually, the measurement process is terminated either by
selecting Measurement | Stop or by clicking the Stop button
on the toolbar. All the ongoing
calls will be stopped and scanning will be terminated. Data transfers will be stopped, PDP context
will be deactivated, and GPRS detach will be performed.
3. Nemo Outdoor will display a report window with some call statistics. At this point, you can choose if
you would like to save this file or delete it. You can also start a playback of this file.
4. If you wish to exit Nemo Outdoor, select File | Exit or click the cross in the upper right corner of the
Nemo Outdoor main window.

When carrying out measurements using a script, stopping the measurement is not
recommended while a test call is on. Always wait until the end of the call, then select
Measurement | Stop Script or click the Stop button to end the measurement. If the measurement
is stopped while the test call is on, it may affect the Quality Survey Report values. The Call
Length from the TCH assignment percentage in this report might indicate calls to be shorter
than they actually were.

3 24

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

MEASUREMENT REPORT

The Measurement Report dialog is displayed when recording is stopped. The dialog displays some
statistics from the measurement.
Select the Save statistics to file option to save the statistics to a separate Excel .csv file. The
filename is the same as for the actual measurement file and the file is located in the Results folder.
Select the Send measurement results to FTP server option to send the log files to an FTP server.
See chapter Uploading Measurement Files to Server for more information.
If you do not want this dialog to appear, select the Do not show this dialog again option.
Select the Compress measurement file(s) option to automatically compress the files below into a
single measurement archive (ZIP file). After the files are compressed, the original files are deleted.

measurement files (.nmf)

binary files (.nbl)

packet capture files (.pcap)

marker files (.mrk)

indoor map files (.tab and image)

To save the measurement file under another name, click the Rename button and type a new file name
in the field that appears. To delete the file without saving, click the Delete button. To export the
measurement, click the Export button (see Exporting Measurements).

END ING MEASUREMENT S

3 25

Click the Playback button to playback the measurement file immediately. To save the file, click Save.

Note that if you press Esc on your computers keyboard, or click on the
button on the
dialog, you will save the measurement file just as if you had clicked on the Save button.
Click the Export button the access the Export Measurements dialog (see Exporting Measurements).
Click the Analyze button to open the measurement file for analysis in Nemo Analyze.

Note that this requires that you have Nemo Analyze installed on the same computer where
Nemo Outdoor is installed.

In the Export to Nemo Analyze dialog, select a workbook where the data is opened and/or a report
template that is used for creating a report from the data. If you do not select a workbook or a report,
the measurement file is added to the Nemo Analyze database without starting Nemo Analyze. Finally
click Export.

3 26

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

MEASUREMENT RESULTS
This section guides you on viewing and analyzing the measurement results produced by Nemo
Outdoor, and explains how measurement files are uploaded to an FTP server.
The measurement process produces one or more output files at a time, depending on whether you
have been using a mobile and a scanner at the same time or just one device at a time. The file name
can be user defined but Nemo Outdoor always decides the extension part. If you change the file name
manually, the file name format should be xxxx.1.nmf where the number refers to the device number.

ANALYZING MEASUREMENT RESULTS


The measurement results produced by Nemo Outdoor can be viewed and analyzed, for example, with:

Nemo Outdoor Playback functions


Nemo Analyze
Text editor
Spreadsheet software such as Microsoft Excel
Mapping software via conversion utilities provided by Anite Finland Ltd.

PLAYING BACK MEASUREMENT FILES


Playback is a handy tool for making a quick analysis of measurements. You can playback files
anytime and anywhere immediately after the measurement has been finished or later on.

Selecting Playback Files


When you open a file for playback, Nemo Outdoor will deactivate all connected devices. Nemo
Outdoor will ask if you would like to save the current device. If you answer Yes, Nemo Outdoor will
save the current configuration and reactivate the devices that you had connected before the playback
when you close the playback file(s).

U SER INTERF AC E

3 27

To open files for playback, select File Open Measurement. This will open up the following dialog.

In the dialog, you can look for a file by clicking the button. The File Header box displays the
measurement file header. If you have selected a multi measurement, you can remove some of the
files from playback.

During Playback
The Playback commands can be executed with a set of toolbar buttons. The same commands can be
found in the Playback menu.
The Play button starts the playback.
The Pause button pauses the playback.
The Stop button stops the playback.
The status bar at the bottom of the main window displays the progress of the playback; that is, the
starting, ending, and current time. There is also a time slider which you can use to jump into certain
points in the measurement.

3 28

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Viewing and Moving Markers


You can use the grid window to view the markers you have inserted in a measurement file during
measurements. After a file has been loaded, select the Play command from the Playback menu or
click the Play button on the tool bar.
Open a marker grid from Data | Events Grid | User Markers.

The grid window will display all the markers that you have inserted in the file during measurements.
Click on any of the markers in the grid window, and all the other open windows will display the same
point of time.

U SER INTERF AC E

3 29

Markers are also displayed on the Indoor map along with the marker number. You can move the
markers by selecting a marker from the list (click the index number) and pressing the Move button.
Place the red pin to the new location on the map. The new longitude and latitude information is saved
in the marker file.

Closing Playback Files


After playback, you need to close the playback file. Select File | Close Measurement. If you saved
the current device configuration when you started the playback, Nemo Outdoor will ask if you would
like to load the same device(s).

3 30

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

UPLOADING MEASUREMENT FILES TO SERVER


You can upload measurement files from Nemo Outdoor to an FTP or HTTPS server when a
measurement is stopped, or at any later point via the Nemo Outdoor user interface. Note that it is
recommended to stop all measurements before uploading files.
Select File | Send Measurement to Server. First select the server type, FTP or HTTP from the
bottom left corner of the dialog and then select the measurement files.

Click the Options button to define settings for the server.

Define the server address, username, and password and the name of the Remote folder, i.e. folder
in which the measurement files are sent on the server.
Select the Use SFTP protocol option to send the measurement files using SFTP protocol.
Select the Use secure protocol option to send the measurement files using HTTPS protocol.
Select the Use passive mode option to send the measurement files using passive mode.

U SER INTERF AC E

3 31

When the Move local files to Sent folder after upload option is selected, the measurement files
are moved to the Sent folder in the C:\Nemo Tools directory on your computer after the transfer. You
can also change this default destination in User Interface Properties | Paths | Measurements.
The file transfer can be performed using a default Internet connection or via a user-selected dial-up
connection.
When you select the Use a Proxy Server option, the Proxy address, Username and Password
fields will become active.
After configuring the settings, click OK. The measurement file(s) are sent to the server.

If you upload files on an HTTPS server, the URL from which the file can be loaded is displayed for
each uploaded file. URLs can be easily copied and distributed e.g. by email.

EXPORTING MEASUREMENTS
With the Export Measurements functionality it is possible to export measurement files from Nemo File
Format to MapInfo or .csv formats. Close all measurements and select File | Export Measurements.
You can also export individual measurements through the Measurement Report dialog when you are
ending measurements.

3 32

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

The Export Measurements dialog is opened.

U SER INTERF AC E

3 33

Template contains a predefined set of parameters and parameter rules for export. To create a new
template, select New in the Template field and type a name for the template. Then select the
parameters that will be exported and define parameter rules. When you export the parameters, the
settings are saved. The saved template will be available in the Template field the next time you open
the Export Measurements dialog.
With the Add Measurement and Add Folder buttons you can add individual measurement files or
entire folders containing measurement files to be exported.
Export format defines the format in which the files are stored. The options are MapInfo TAB file and
CSV file.
Number of values per parameter defines the maximum number of values exported for parameters
that can have multiple values.
Export interval defines at what rate (in seconds or meters) parameter values are sampled from the
measurement data for export. If you select all, all data is exported.
By default, multiple values of the same parameter are exported in a single column. To create a
separate column for each value, select the Separate values to columns option.
With the Export files to folder option, the individual files will be saved in a folder. Also define the
Target folder.
With the Export to single file option, the selected files will be stored in a single .tab file.
Click the Select Parameters button to define which parameters will be included in the export.

Select a parameter from the list of available parameters and with the arrow button move it to the right.
The selected parameters will be exported.
You can also make more rules for selecting parameter values for export. Only those parameter values
that meet the rule will be exported. Click the Edit Rules button.

3 34

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Select a parameter from the field in the middle. Then define the condition and value for the parameter
and click Add to List. You can define as many rules as you wish. Finally click OK.
When you have selected all parameters to be exported, click OK.

U SER INTERF AC E

3 35

USER INTERFACE
This section presents the Nemo Outdoor user interface. You will find general descriptions on all the
commands and windows. The functions and dialogs related to the commands are described in detail in
the following sections.
The Nemo Outdoor user interface is compatible with common Windows standards. If you are not
familiar with these standards, refer to your Microsoft Windows Documentation.

VIEW GROUPS
View Groups is a function that allows you to organize measurement windows into different tabs for
easier viewing. This is especially useful if you have several graphs and maps open at the same time
and you have to overlap them to fit them all in the Nemo Outdoor main window. Now you can create
view groups and organize the measurement windows into several groups. Each view group appears at
the bottom of the main window as a tab that you can view by clicking the tab.

When you start Nemo Outdoor for the first time, you will have one default view group. To rename the
default view group, right-click on the tab and select Rename.

Enter a name for the view group and click OK.

To create a new view group, right-click on the empty area next to the existing view groups, and select
Create New. Enter a name for the view group and click OK. The new view group appears as another
tab.

To organize measurement windows into the view groups, open a view group, for example, Maps, and
open the windows that you would like to have in this particular view group. Then go to another view
group by clicking on the respective tab, for example, Graphs and open measurement windows there.
The windows are automatically saved in the view groups and will be opened the next time you start
Nemo Outdoor.
To copy the contents of an existing view group to a new view group, right-click on the view group label
and select Copy to New View Group. Type a name for the new view group and select the device for
which the data is displayed.

3 36

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

If you need to change the device for which the views in a particular view group are displaying data,
right-click the view group label and select Select Device. Select the device from the list. All the views
in the view group will be updated to display data from the selected device.

MENU BAR
The menu bar contains all Nemo Outdoor commands. The commands are arranged in menus. Some
commands execute their respective operations immediately, while others will first display a dialog with
options for you to select from. A command ending in three dots () will open a dialog. Note that you
can use shortcut keys to carry out some of the commands. The shortcut keys are presented on the
menus next to the menu commands.

TOOLBAR
You can use the toolbar with the mouse for quick access to frequently used commands. In the View
menu, you can choose to hide the toolbar; this will bring more space to the other objects in the main
window.
The Nemo Outdoor toolbar comprises of a set of buttons that allow you to perform common tasks
quickly. For example, to start the measurement, just click the Start Recording button on the toolbar.
See chapter Toolbar Buttons for more information on the Nemo Outdoor toolbar buttons.

STATUS BAR
The status bar at the bottom of the Nemo Outdoor window gives you variable information depending
on the operations you are performing. For example, when you are pointing to a toolbar button with the
mouse (without clicking), the status bar will show a description of the corresponding function. You can
also see a brief description of the same function in a help box that appears next to the button when
you hold the mouse over the button long enough. There is also a time slider which you can use to
jump into certain points in the measurement.
In the View menu, you can select to hide the status bar; this will bring more space to the other objects
in the main window.

U SER INTERF AC E

3 37

NEMO OUTDOOR MENUS


The menus in the Nemo Outdoor software are introduced next.

File Menu

The File menu allows you to open and save Workspace files and Device Configurations.
Measurement files for playback are also opened through the File menu.
By selecting the Save Workspace on Exit option, the current configuration is saved in a file and
opened automatically the next time the program is started. The Work Offline item activates and
deactivates the offline mode. The Send Measurement to FTP Server enables you to send
measurement files to an FTP server (see chapter Uploading Measurement Files to Server). With the
Export Measurements tool you can export measurement files from Nemo File Format to MapInfo or
.csv formats (see chapter Exporting Measurements). With the Export and Import Settings items you
can export and import settings into an .aex file. The following items are stored in the .aex file:

Scripts

Color sets

Custom views

Device configurations

Notification settings

Route plans

Workspaces

3 38

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

You can also export measurements. Note that measurement needs to be closed before export.
The Recent Workspaces, Recent Device Configurations, and Recent Measurements items
display the recently used workspaces and device configurations and recently viewed playback files,
respectively. With the Exit command you can close the program.

Edit Menu

In the Edit menu, you can copy and save as images selected items from the Nemo Outdoor program.
It is also possible to export data views as images and open them in MS Word or PowerPoint. Please
note that playback needs to be idle or paused and measurement must be paused when exporting
views.
The Find command allows you to search through the measurement file opened in the grid.

U SER INTERF AC E

3 39

View Menu

In the View menu, you can select, hide and display items of the main window, such as the standard
toolbar, custom window toolbar, status indicator, output, and device status, those you wish to see on
the screen. Through quick windows you have easy access to custom windows defined by the user.
You can also access the Configuration Manager, Color Set Editor, Notification Manager, User
Parameters and the User Interface Properties dialogs. Through the View Groups item you can
create new view groups or switch between existing View Groups. The Active View Properties will
open a properties dialog for the currently active window.

3 40

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Measurement Menu

Through the Measurement menu, you can control the measurement process and add, autodetect,
and remove devices.
The Start Scripts command starts and stops a user-defined script file. These same commands can be
executed by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button in the toolbar. In the Script Editor you can edit
script files. With the Start Measurement List item you can edit and run Measurement Lists. You can
also add markers and textual notes in the measurement file. The Clear Buffers command will empty
the event history buffer. This does not affect the measurement file.
Measurement Servers and Nemo Invex Maintenance Tool items apply only to Nemo Invex.
Through the All Devices item you can control several devices at once. For example, you can make a
voice call or send an SMS with all test mobiles connected to Nemo Outdoor.

U SER INTERF AC E

3 41

Below All Devices are listed individually all measurement devices connected to the system. Through
these items you can control and configure the individual test terminals.

Measurement Properties General, Measurement Properties Measurement, Measurement


Properties Frequency Scanning with Mobiles, Measurement Properties Pilot Scanning with
Mobiles, and Measurement Properties - Script dialogs can be accessed through this menu. By
selecting the Reset command, you can reset the Devices window, for example, if you want to
reconnect and activate a device after disconnecting it.
The menu also offers access to various actions that can be performed during manual measurements.
If you are using scripts to run measurements, you will not need these commands.

Please note that the menu displays only those functions that are supported by the device.

Note that you cannot use scripts with scanners.

3 42

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Remote Menu

Through the Remote menu you can activate the Remote mode, initiate a maintenance session, and
cancel all pending remote sessions.

Playback Menu

The Playback menu offers you tools for the playback of measurement data. You can also export a
measurement file to Nemo Analyze by selecting Analyze. This will open the Export to Nemo Analyze
dialog.

Data Menu
Through the Data menu you can open different views for observing a measurement. You can also
access the Open Custom Window dialog (see chapter Custom Windows).

Under each type you will find a selection of premade custom windows of the selected type. If you
select New, Nemo Outdoor will open an empty graph of the selected type.

U SER INTERF AC E

3 43

The Grid items offer a selection of grid types. Events grids list, by default, all measurement events but
the user can configure the view so that only events that are of special interest are displayed.
Parameters grids display selected network parameters. Statistics grids list various statistics, such as,
the number of PDP context activation attempts, successes, and failures from the measurement.
Messages grids are used for observing layer 2 and 3, RLC/MAC, and LLC messages. Table grids
provide an easy way of simultaneously displaying the same parameter values for multiple instances.
For example, the neighbor list of a serving cell can be displayed in a table grid so that each row
represents one neighbor and each column represents a parameter value (e.g., system, carrier,
scrambling code, etc.). The Packet Decoder Grid offers a chance to display and decode packet
capture files in playback mode.
The Indoor item opens a floorplan (see chapter Viewing Indoor Maps). The Map item opens a map
window (see chapter Viewing Maps).
The Save as Custom Window item offers a quick way to save your own custom windows. The
custom windows are presented in chapter Custom Windows.
The Save Custom Window Changes option saves changes to custom windows. For example, if you
resize the windows, Nemo Outdoor will open the window in the same size the next time you start the
program.

Window Menu

The Window menu provides you with a list of all open windows on the main window. You can switch
the focus between these windows and arrange them with the Cascade, Tile Horizontally, Tile
Vertically, and Arrange Icons commands. With the Close All command you can close all windows at
once. The active window is marked with a check mark .

Help Menu

The Help menu offers you quick access to all the most important help topics, the shortcut guide, and
the Nemo File Format document. By selecting the License Information item, you can check the
current license status for your Nemo Outdoor version. From the About dialog you can also receive
further information on the Nemo Outdoor application, including the contact information and the
application version number.

3 44

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

CUSTOMIZING MENUS AND TOOLBARS


Nemo Outdoor menus and toolbars are fully customizable. To edit the contents of menus, to add new
menus, or edit the toolbars, right-click on the menu bar or toolbar at the top of the main window and
select Customize.

In the Toolbars page hide and display the default toolbars by clearing and selecting the
corresponding options. Click the New button to create a new toolbar. In the New Toolbar dialog, type
a name for the new toolbar and click OK.

U SER INTERF AC E

3 45

The new toolbar is added to the Customize dialog. Delete the toolbar by selecting it and clicking the
Delete button.

In the Commands page you will find all available commands sorted under categories. Drag
commands from the list to a toolbar or menu.

3 46

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

To remove commands from a toolbar or menu, drag and drop the command outside the toolbar or
menu. If you want to restore the original toolbar and menu content, open the Customize dialog (rightclick on main toolbar and select Customize) and in the Toolbars page, select the toolbar or menu bar
you want to restore and click the Reset button.

U SER INTERF AC E

3 47

In the Options page you can further personalize the appearance of toolbars and menus. For example,
you can activate large icons for toolbars for easier viewing or change the menu animations.

You can also change the icon for each toolbar button. Open the Customize dialog, right-click on a
button, and select Change Button Image.

3 48

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

NEMO OUTDOOR WINDOWS


The windows in Nemo Outdoor are highly user configurable. Different network parameters and events
can be viewed as line graphs, bars, and dots. To make the measuring process easier for first-time
users, Nemo Outdoor offers some ready-made custom windows that include some essential windows
for specific types of measuring. The users are also able to make their own custom windows and save
them for later use.

Custom Windows
Nemo Outdoor offers a selection of premade graphs and grids which can be quickly accessed through
the Data menu or the Custom window tool bar if selected in the View menu. They are also accessible
through the parameter tree. The custom windows are grouped under the corresponding graph and grid
types. You can also browse for the existing custom windows through the Open Custom Window
dialog (Data | Open Custom Window).

You can view the existing custom windows sorted by type (graph, grid, map, indoor view) or by
technology (AMPS, CDMA, GSM, UMTS, etc.). Select the custom window you would like to open from
the table on the right and click Open.

U SER INTERF AC E

3 49

You can also save your own custom windows. When you have set up a graph view that you would like
to use later on, activate the window that you would like to save and select Data | Save as Custom
Window. Nemo Outdoor will ask you to type a name for the new custom window. After clicking OK,
the window is added to the custom windows list. If you want to remove some custom windows, select
the custom window that you want to remove and click the Delete button.
The Quick Windows bar
(go to View, and select Quick Windows) in
Nemo Outdoor main window offers quick access to custom windows. Click on one of the quick
windows, and select a custom window from the list. Click OK. The next time you click on the same
quick window button, that selected custom window will appear.

Parameter Tree Search Functionality


A user-specified search string can be used to search parameters, parameter short names and
possible alias names.
In addition, the string matching supports multiple search substrings separated by spaces i.e. HSDPA
BLER search string matches, for example, HSDPA MAC-hs BLER and HSDPA HARQ process BLER.

3 50

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Devices View

The Devices view offers easy access to the most common commands and configuration dialogs. The
view displays all devices connected to Nemo Outdoor and the device-specific commands. By doubleclicking the various items in the view, you can access the related configuration dialogs. For example,
double-click the FTP item to access the FTP Transfer Properties dialog.

U SER INTERF AC E

3 51

It is also possible to select multiple devices (Ctrl+left-click) and define settings that will be applied to all
selected devices. For example, if the same APN is used with several devices, you can select the
devices and define the APN for all devices at one go. When you have selected multiple devices, you
can only edit settings that are supported by all the selected devices.
From the Supported Data Protocols list, select the data protocol (FTP, SMTP, TCP/UDP, etc.) used
in the measurements.
Measurement servers button opens the Measurement
Servers dialog (see Nemo Invex Device Set-Up) where you
can connect to Nemo Invex servers. Note that this button is
activated only if your Nemo Outdoor license includes the
Nemo Invex option.
Add or remove devices button opens a menu where you can
choose to add a new device or remove the selected device.
Measurement control button offers access to some
commands that are supported by the selected device, such as,
start/stop voice call, GPRS attach/detach, SMS/MMS message
sending.
Measurement settings button offers access to configuration
and properties dialogs. The selection is device-specific.
Device connection settings button opens the Device
Configuration dialog (see Devices).
Device measurement settings button opens the
Measurement Properties Measurement page for the selected
device.
Device notification settings button opens the Measurement
Properties - Notifications page (see Notifications) for the
selected device.
Device script settings button opens the Measurement
Properties - Script page for the selected device.
Group devices by type/server button organizes the devices
in the view.

3 52

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Device Status View

The Device Status view displays the device status. The green light at the upper left corner is blinking
whenever the device is active and connected.

U SER INTERF AC E

3 53

Right-click on the Device Status view and select Toggle Status Window Docking Area to dock the
Status view to the top of the main view.

Right-click on the Device Status view and select Reorder Devices to change the order of the devices
in the Device Status and Devices views. Drag and drop the devices in the correct order and finally
click OK.

3 54

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Server Status View


The Server Status view is available only with Nemo Invex.

The Server Status view displays the server status and some information about the server hardware.
Right-click on the Device Status view and select Toggle Status Window Docking Area to dock the
Status view to the top of the main view.
Right-click on a server in the Device Status view and select Add New Device to Measurement
Server to open the Add New Device dialog.
Right-click on the Device Status view and select Measurement Servers to access a list of
measurement servers connected to the system. You can connect and disconnect the servers.
Right-click on a server in the Device Status view and select Restart All VQ Modules to access a list
of measurement servers connected to the system. You can connect and disconnect the servers.

U SER INTERF AC E

3 55

Output Window

The Output window displays program messages and textual notifications. Icons (
) next to
the timestamps clarify the type of message or notification in question. For example, the speech bubble
indicates a normal message, the orange flag a warning, the red flag an error message, and the
exclamation mark a notification. The window can be opened by choosing View | Output. You can
clear the Output window by right-clicking on the window and selecting Clear Window from the popup
menu.

Script Status Window

Note that since you cannot use scripts with scanners, this window is also not available when
making scanner measurements.
From the Script Status window you can follow the progress of the script file used in the current
measurement.

Controlling Windows
You can have several windows open at the same time. The minimizing, maximizing, and closing
functions for individual windows operate in the same way as in all Windows applications. The active
window is indicated through a color specified in the Windows Control Panel to indicate an active
window (see your Microsoft Windows Documentation).
You can drag windows outside the Nemo Outdoor desktop area to make more space on the main
window.

Cascade Windows
The Cascade command in the Window menu organizes the windows in an overlapping array. You can
bring any window to the top by selecting it from the Window menu or by clicking any visible part of that
window (except for the Minimize, Maximize, and Close buttons in the top right corner). You can also
bring the next window to the top by selecting the Next command from the window-specific menu (top
left corner of the window).

3 56

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Tile Windows
The Tile command in the Window menu organizes the windows side by side, filling the whole space
so that all windows are visible at the same time. The windows can be tiled horizontally or vertically.

Arrange Icons
The windows that have been minimized to icons can be arranged evenly in a row at the bottom of the
main window, starting from the left side. To do this, select the Arrange Icons command in the Window
menu.

Close All
The Close All command in the Window menu can be used to close all measurement windows in the
Nemo Outdoor main window.

Saving Window Settings


If you wish to retain the same settings on your main window the next time you use Nemo Outdoor,
activate the Save Workspace on Exit command in the File menu. Clicking the command will result on
a check mark ; the second click will remove the mark.

TR OU BL ESHOO T ING

3 57

TROUBLESHOOTING
This section describes some of the possible problem situations that may occur in Nemo Outdoor.

LOW THROUGHPUT
In case lower data throughputs are received with Nemo Outdoor compared to third party applications,
read this chapter for troubleshooting throughput problems with various TCP based protocols.
In case low throughput values are monitored with Nemo Outdoor and also with third party applications,
the issue can most likely be seen by observing link adaptation parameters.
For example, low average CQI and high MAC-HS 3rd retransmission rate indicate an area of bad
coverage or high interference. Low HS-SCCH usage rate (= high HSDPA DTX percentage ratio)
points to capacity, server or transmission problems.
In LTE networks, observe physical resource block allocation (PRB) and signal to noise ratio (SNR).
PRB affects throughput directly. Values less than maximum may indicate other users in the cell, a
bottleneck in the transmission network or not enough data to be sent (application does not need all the
available bandwidth).
Requested throughput much higher than the actual measured throughput may indicate that there are
other users sharing the radio resources of the cell or some other bottleneck in the network that
prevents the mobile from getting the maximum achievable throughput.
High PUSCH TX power values indicate a lack of uplink coverage.
When operating in the dynamic range of link adaptation, average BLER (PDSCH BLER) should be
higher than 0, typically 10-20%, in order to achieve the gain of HARQ retransmission scheme
Residual BLER after all HARQ retransmissions should be 0%. Higher values indicate that the radio
link is about to drop. Observe the MAC downlink/uplink residual BLER (%) values.
Other things that could help troubleshooting:

Disable any firewall and/or antivirus software that could reduce the throughput. Some HSPA USB
interfaces may also install their own software which may affect to window size settings in registry.

Disable IP capturing from Measurement Properties Measurement page..

Try another FTP server for comparison.

Command prompt FTP throughput. This comparison is recommended because command prompt
FTP does not use any multithreading or other non-standard methods. For better results, keep
Nemo Outdoor at the background measuring the mobile network while making the transfers. Also
try different servers.

For Nemo Outdoor 5.60 and older versions: Run a script with simultaneous FTP transfers to see if
the throughput increases. Does not work manually, script is always needed.

For Nemo Outdoor 5.70 and later versions: Use the multithread feature of the FTP protocol to test
simultaneous transfers. Works also manually.

3 58

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

All Windows Versions


How to check the TCP window size from packet logs:
Using Wireshark:
1. Check the .pcap file and look at the (non FTP-DATA) TCP traffic in the middle of the transfer.
Window size value tells the current TCP window size used.

Using Nemo Outdoor:


1. Open a packet grid window in Nemo Outdoor.
2. Look at the TCP traffic in the middle of an FTP transfer with PayloadLen=0:

3. Double click the frame to get detailed frame info. Look at the Tcp tree. Window shows the current
value.

Using debug logs (for developers, help desk, etc.):


1. Look for the GetWindowSizeFromRegistry() function.

TCP Window size set to n = Value found from registry.

TCP Window size set to default: n = Value not found from registry. Set to default.

TCP Auto-Tuning detected. Window size not set. = Windows Vista/7 is using auto-tuning TCP
window.

2. A measurement file does not save window size info. Packet log and/or debug log is always
needed.

TR OU BL ESHOO T ING

3 59

Windows does not use static window sizes from the registry. They rely on dynamic window size which
is handled by TCP auto-tuning feature. However, if the same registry value that XP uses is set,
Outdoor reads it and adjusts the manual window size based on this value. In most cases, the registry
has been edited by a third party software or a USB mobile interface driver/software. This registry entry
can be removed.
If TCP auto-tuning is disabled, Windows will limit the window size to 64 KB even if the value has been
configured to be higher from Nemo Outdoor.

How to check TCP auto-tuning state:


1. Open command prompt by typing CMD to Search programs and files field.

2. Type netsh interface tcp show global

3. Receive Window Auto-Tuning Level shows the current state.

Please note that administrator rights are required to change auto-tuning settings.

3 60

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

4. Open command prompt by typing CMD to Search programs and files field. Right-click and
select Run as administrator.

5. To disable auto-tuning type netsh interface tcp set global autotuning=disabled. This limits the
TCP window size to 64KB.
6. To increase the maximum TCP window size that auto-tuning uses, type netsh interface tcp set
global autotuning=highlyrestricted.
7. Below are all the values of auto-tuning level with explanations:

disabled: Uses a fixed value for the TCP receive window. Limits to 64 KB (65535).

highlyrestricted: Recommended. Allows the receive window to grow beyond its default value,
very conservatively.

restricted: Recommended. Somewhat restricted growth of the TCP receive window beyond its
default value.

normal: Default value. Allows the receive window to grow to accommodate most conditions.

experimental: Allows the receive window to grow to accommodate extreme scenarios (not
recommended, it can degrade performance in common scenarios, only intended for research
purposes). It enables receive window values of over 16 MB.

TR OU BL ESHOO T ING

3 61

DEVICE STATUS VIEW


The Device Status view displays the device status.

If a green light is blinking, it means that the device is properly connected to Nemo Outdoor and is
functioning normally.
If a red light is blinking, it means that the device has been disconnected. Connect the device, rightclick on the device in the Devices view and select Reset.

CANNOT ADD DEVICES


If the Add button
is deactivated in the Configuration Manager window when you start Nemo
Outdoor, your version of Nemo Outdoor is an unlicensed evaluation version. Please, see chapter
Licensing for more information.
If the HASP USB key is plugged in and the Add button is deactivated, check that recording is not on.
Also, playback should be stopped and playback files closed (File | Close Measurement).

3 62

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

CANNOT MAKE CALLS/PACKET TRANSFERS


If the commands are inactive in the Measurement control menu
, check that you have devices
online. The Work offline or online button
should be unselected.

MEASUREMENT FILE CHECKSUM NOTIFICATION


Measurement file has a checksum that detects modifications to the measurement file after the
measurement is stopped. The checksum is validated when loading measurement files for playback.
The user is notified by the Nemo Outdoor user interface when opening a measurement file where
modification is detected. However, measurement files are still opened normally. The last line in the
measurement file is HASH events including time stamp and checksum information.

#HASH,14:46:49.262,1,"0360D938749FFE82B15545D3E55B75C0"
Measurement files made with Nemo Outdoor 5.4 or earlier do not include checksum information and
the notification is always prompted when such a file is opened with Nemo Outdoor version 5.50 or
later.

N EM O OUTD OOR BUT TON S

3 63

NEMO OUTDOOR BUTTONS


TOOLBAR BUTTONS
These are the buttons available in the Nemo Outdoor toolbar.
Title

Button

Description

Open Playback File(s)

Opens an existing
measurement for
playback

Open Workspace

Opens an existing
workspace file.

Save Workspace

Saves the current


workspace configuration.

Configuration
Manager

Opens the Configuration


Manager dialog.

Work Offline

Switches the offline mode


on and off.

Start Recording

Nemo Outdoor starts


writing a file of the current
measurement.

Start Playback

Starts the playback with


the selected files.

Pause

Pauses the
playback/recording.

Stop

Stops the
playback/recording.

Start/Stop Scripts

Switches a script on/off.

Add Marker

Adds a marker in the


measurement file or on
the Indoor map.

Add Textual Note

Adds a textual note in the


measurement file.

Open Custom Window

Opens the Open Custom


Window dialog.

Save As New Custom


Window

Saves the active window


as a new custom window.

Save Changes to
Custom Window

Saves changes to the


active custom window.

Save As Image

Saves the active window


as an image file (.jpg).

3 64

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

DIALOG BUTTONS
These are the dialog buttons used in Nemo Outdoor.
Title

Button

Description

Expand
Device Info
Window

Displays the selected device info


parameters in the Device Info
window.

Device
notification
settings

Opens the Notifications dialog


where you can select the events
of which Nemo Outdoor will
display or play a notification.

Device
Commands

Through the Device Commands


button you have access to various
mobile specific functions.

Device
Settings

Offers access to several dialogs.

Autodetect
Devices

Automatically detects devices


connected to Nemo Outdoor.

Refresh

Updates information in the


Configuration Manager.

Properties

Opens a Properties dialog for the


selected item in the Configuration
Manager.

Add

Adds a new device, event trigger,


or script depending on the item
selected in the Configuration
Manager.

Remove

Removes the selected device,


event trigger, or script from the
Configuration Manager.

N EM O OUTD OOR BUT TON S

3 65

GRAPH TOOLBAR BUTTONS


These are the toolbar buttons available when using graphs.
Title

Button

Description

Hide Layer

Hides the selected layer in the


graph

Remove Layer

Removes the selected layer

New Layer

Opens the New Layer dialog


where you can configure a new
layer to be added in the active
graph.

Layer
Properties

Opens the Layer Properties dialog


where you can edit an existing
layer.

Move Layer
Down

Moves the selected layer down in


the layer view

Move Layer
Up

Moves the selected layer up in the


layer view

Set Stacked
Mode

If there are two or more layers in


a graph, you can view them in
stacked mode; that is, in separate
graphs.

Autoscroll

When the button is pressed down,


the graph is scrolling
automatically as the
measurement proceeds.

Show Panels

Displays the info panel with


numerical values on the right side
of the graph.

3 66

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

MAP TOOLBAR BUTTONS


These are the toolbar buttons available when using maps.
Title

Button

Description

Open Map

Opens the Open dialog for selecting a map file.

Save Map

Saves the current map layers and settings into a


MapInfo Geoset file (.gst).

Import Map

Opens the Map Import Parameters dialog for importing


bitmap images as floorplans. Available only in the
Indoor map.

Layer
Properties

Opens the selected layer's Properties dialog where you


can configure the layer properties.

Find Map at
Position

With the automatic map find feature the user can easily
locate all maps from same location.

Create Route
Plan

Creates a route plan from an open measurement.

Open Route
Plan

Through this item you can open saved route plans.

Save Route
Plan

Allows you to save the route plan as a Route Plan File


(.rpf).

Add Waypoint

Activates the add waypoint functionality for creating


route plans manually.

Arrow

Changes the cursor into an arrow, which you can use


for selecting items.

Pan

Changes the cursor into a hand, which you can use for
dragging the map to a different position. Place the
hand on the map. Keep the left mouse button pressed
down and move the map.

Center

Changes the cursor into the center tool, which you can
use for selecting a point on the map on which the map
view will be centered.

Zoom In

Changes the cursor into a magnifying glass, which you


can use for zooming in on the map.

Zoom Out

Changes the cursor into a magnifying glass, which you


can use for zooming out on the map.

Clear Route

Clears the measurement route from the map. This


button is active only during measurements. It cannot
be used during playback.

Set Current
Location

Set Current Location tool defines the current location


when no GPS data is available. That this command is
activated only during measurements and when no
GPS is connected. It cannot be used during playback.

N EM O OUTD OOR BUT TON S

3 67

Auto Center

With the Auto Center tool activated, the map view will
always center on the test vehicle. This requires that a
GPS receiver is used.

Auto Center
Sensitivity

The Auto center sensitivity slider defines in


percentages the sensitivity of the activated Auto
Center tool. The higher the percentage, the sooner the
map is centered on the test vehicle when it moves
around on the route.

Previous View

Click the Previous View button to return to the previous


map view, for example, if you have moved the map
with the Pan tool.

Entire Map

Click the Entire Map button to display the entire map


after zooming in.

Entire Route

With the Entire Route button you can view the whole
route on the map.

Scale Bar

Activate the Scale Bar button to view a scale bar in the


map window.

Measure
Distance

With the Measure Distance tool you can measure the


distance on the map in kilometers between multiple
points.

Side Panel

Activate the Side Panel button to view the side panel in


the map window.

3 68

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

SHORTCUT KEYS
This is a complete list of the shortcut keys available in Nemo Outdoor. This window can be displayed
by pressing down the F2 key when using Nemo Outdoor.

NO T IF IC AT ION SYMBOL S

3 69

NOTIFICATION SYMBOLS
Below are described the default notification symbols.
Attach Attempt

MMS Receiving Attempt

Attach Failed

MMS Receiving Failed

Attach Success

MMS Receiving Success


MMS Sending Attempt

Call Alerting

MMS Sending Failed

Call Answered

MMS Sending Success

Call Attempt
Call Connected

Packet Call Attempt

Call Disconnect

Packet Call Connected

Call Dropped

Packet Call Disconnected

Call Failed

Packet Call Failed

Call Received

Packet Technology Changed to HSDPA


Packet Technology Changed to UMTS

Cell Change Attempt

PTT Idle

Cell Change Failed

PTT Receiving

Cell Change Success

PTT Transmitting

Cell Reselection
Cell Reselection (3G) GSM/UMTS

RX Level Low/Bad

Cell Reselection (2G) UMTS/GSM

Routing Area Update Attempt


Routing Area Update Failed

Context Activation Attempt

Routing Area Update Success

Context Activation Failed


Context Activation Success

Semiduplex Call Attempt

Context Deactivation

Service Lost

3 70

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Service Received
Data Call Attempt
Data Connection Attempt

SMS/USSD Received

Data Connection Failed

SMS/USSD Receiving Attempt

Data Connection Success

SMS/USSD Receiving Failed

Data Disconnect

SMS/USSD Sending Completed

Data Transfer Attempt


Data Transfer Success

Soft Handover Failure

Data Transfer Failed

Soft Handover Success

Dead Reckoning in Use

TX Power High/UL Power Up High

Detach
Differential GPS in Use

Video Call Attempt

Duplex Call Attempt

Voice Call Attempt/Voice Call Attempt


(ETSI)

FER High

Voice Call Connected (ETSI)


Voice Call Disconnected (ETSI)

GPS Fix Lost

Voice Call Dropped (ETSI)

GPS Fix Received


HS-DSCH Serving Cell Changed

Star
Thumb Down

Handover Attempt
Handover Failed
Handover Success

Location Area Update Attempt


Location Area Update Failed
Location Area Update Success

Thumb Up

NO T IF IC AT ION SYMBOL S

Marker
Markov Call Attempt
Measurement Error

3 71

3 72

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

TECHNICAL SUPPORT
If you have questions on or beyond this documentation about Nemo tools, please contact our technical
support service through Nemo Support Portal at http://nemosupport.anite.com, call us (local phone
numbers can be found in chapter Phone and Email Support) or send us an email at
nemosupport@anite.com. Note that for full support you need to have the Maintenance Agreement.

USER CLUB
Nemo User Club offers several new ways to benefit from Nemo products. You can find it from
http://nemouserclub.anite.com.
Access to the Nemo User Club is restricted to customers with SW maintenance and Technical
Support agreements or partner agreements. If you are an existing Anite Finland customer with SW
maintenance and Technical Support agreements, but you are without access to the User Club, please
complete an on-line registration form.
After submitting the requested information, you will receive a personal access key and password by
email in a few days time.
Once you are registered with our User Club, you will automatically receive e-mails informing you
each time a new version of software for your Nemo Product is released. It is fast, easy, and it is
available to you seven days a week, 24 hours a day.

NEMO SUPPORT PORTAL


Nemo Support Portal is a web interface for technical support, product-related questions, and RMA
requests. It offers a fast and convenient way to reach our technical support team and submit repair,
warranty repair, and calibration requests. Customers can open a support ticket, follow the status of
existing tickets, and request technical support 24/7/365. Furthermore the Nemo Support Portal
includes a Knowledge Base for the most frequent and latest topics on Nemo Products. Submitting a
ticket via Nemo Support Portal ensures that our technical specialists have all the necessary
information available to solve your support case, resulting in faster response times.
Please go to http://nemosupport.anite.com to access the portal and click Request access to obtain a
password to the system.

PHONE AND EMAIL SUPPORT


During the warranty period, the phone support related to potential software errors is free of additional
charge. Registered users with a valid Maintenance Agreement are entitled to full support. Nemo
Support Portal is the preferred channel for technical support requests, but you can also send us an
email. When emailing, please let us know the number of your Software Maintenance and Support
Agreement.

T ECHN IC AL SU PPORT

3 73

Please contact us at the following locations (global email address nemosupport@anite.com):


Global
Tel.
Americas
Tel.

+358 50 395 7800

+1 469 951 9105


+1 469 774 4608 (En espaol e portugus)

APAC
Tel.

+65 9746 2431

P.R. China
Tel.

+86 10 6567 8528

India
Tel.

+91 982 0016372

3 74

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

APPENDIX 1
MAKING MAPINFO RASTER MAPS
Using raster image files, you can bring paper maps, photographs, and other graphic images into
MapInfo. You can scan paper maps and then use paper maps as the foundation for the maps you
create in MapInfo. After scanning the paper map into a raster image file, you can display it in a map
window.
Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Analyze support .TIF, .GIF, and .JPG formats. MapInfo can read the
following types of raster images:
- filename.TIF
- filename.GIF
- filename.JPG
- filename.PCX
- filename.BMP
- filename.BIL
Color options are:
-

Monochrome images: each pixel in a map image can be black or white.

Gray scale images: each pixel in a gray scale image can be black, white, or a shade of gray.

Color images: each pixel can be of any color from a palette of available colors. MapInfo supports
256 colors. When using Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Analyze, we recommend using gray scale
images. By doing this, the measurement route can be discerned better than with color map
images.

Registering a Raster Map with MapInfo SW


If you want to overlay vector data on top of a raster image, then you must register the raster map
image so that MapInfo can position it properly in a Map window. You do this in the Image Registration
Dialog. You must identify control point coordinates and the projection of the raster image map. It is
important to provide accurate control point information when registering a raster map image. Choose
control points that can be easily identified and selected, such as street intersections or use the
coordinates (latitude and longitude grid) for the selected point from a paper map.

To register a raster map:


1. Start the MapInfo software. Choose File | Open Table and Raster Image File Format. Select
your raster map image file (.TIF, .GIF, .JPG) and open it. The Image Registration Dialog is
displayed. A preview of the raster map image appears on the screen.
2. Select the Projection button to specify the projection of the raster image map. If you do not know
the right projection, the default value is Longitude/ Latitude.

APPEND ICES

3 75

3. Start adding control points. Click on a location in the preview (raster image map). The Add Control
Point Dialog is displayed showing the location of the point in pixels. Add Map X and Map Y
coordinates in decimal formats. For example, to specify the coordinates 65 degrees, 30 minutes,
enter 65.5 degrees. Use negative numbers when specifying west and south coordinates. If you
want to register a raster map that does not use longitude and latitude coordinates, specify the
appropriate projection in the Image Registration Dialog. Enter your coordinates in the native units
of the coordinate system. For example, if you are registering a UTM map image, enter coordinates
in meters. Using the MapBasic program, you can convert d/m/s coordinates into decimal degrees
format, or the conversion from d/m/s to decimal degrees is as follows:
degrees+(minutes/60)+(seconds/3600)=decimal degrees
4. You must choose at least three control points. Select points that can be easily identified and
selected in the map window.
5. After all control points have been defined, click OK in the Image Registration dialog. The raster
map will be displayed in the map window.
6. Move filename.tab and filename.tif/gif/jpg files to the map directory of Nemo Outdoor or Nemo
Analyze.
7. Open filename.tab in Nemo Outdoor or Nemo Analyze.

3 76

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

APPENDIX 2
CDMA SETTINGS AND PRL EDITING IN NEMO
OUTDOOR
You can access CDMA Settings and the PRL editing dialog in Nemo Outdoor through Device
Settings .

In the NV items page you are able to read and write nonvolatile memory items.

You need to know your SPC before you can program any of the following settings. A known SPC can
also be overwritten by this plugin.
Directory number defines a phone number

APPEND ICES

3 77

MIN1 defines a seven-digit phone number of the terminal


MIN2 defines a three-digit area code
SPC defines the service programming code
IMSI = IMSI_MCC + IMSI_11_12 + MIN1 + MIN2

On the PRL page you can read and write PRL items. This can be used to load any previously saved
PRLs onto any Qualcomm-based mobile. You can also use this feature to save a PRL from a
connected phone and then use this later to load the same PRL onto a new mobile.

On the DIP Switch page you are able to enable/disable the listed features.

3 78

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Should you need to manually edit a PRL, you can use the Presto tool which can be downloaded from
CDG.org. The download page can be accessed by searching for prl using the search tool on the
main page.

1. Click on the prltools.asp link to get to the downloads page.

2. From there you can download the toolbar suite and the tutorial for it. Install the suite when
launched. This will add a tool bar called Presto to MS Excel.

APPEND ICES

3. Run the Setup.exe file. Click Install in the dialog that appears.

4. Click Next in the PRL Toolbar Suite dialog that appears.

5. Click Next in the Welcome window.


6. Select I Agree in the License Agreement dialog, and click Next.
7. Click Next to confirm installation.
8. Click Close to exit the Installation Finished dialog.
9. Next, open Presto by going to Start | All Programs | QUALCOMM PRL Toolbar Suite |
PRESTO. It should look as follows in Excel:

3 79

3 80

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

APPENDIX 3 - TROUBLESHOOTING DATA


TRANSFER ISSUES
PS CONNECTION WORKS BUT NO DATA
UAC Settings
If UAC (User Account Control) is set to always notify, it might cause issues with data testing. A PS
connection can be established but data transfers cannot be made. It is recommended that the UAC
settings are changed to Never notify. This can be done via User Account Control Settings.

Antivirus Filtering
Disable the antivirus application and Windows firewall. If the data transfer still does not work properly,
please do the following:
1. Activate PS connection (activate PDP context).
2. Go to Network Settings and choose the appropriate connection assigned for the device.
3. Go to Connection Properties and check that antivirus NDIS filtering is unchecked.

Low Data Throughputs


In case lower data throughputs are received with Nemo Outdoor compared to third party applications,
read this document for troubleshooting throughput problems with various TCP based protocols.
In case low throughput values are monitored with Nemo Outdoor and also with third party applications,
the issue can most likely be seen by observing link adaptation parameters.

APPEND ICES

3 81

For example, low average CQI and high MAC-HS 3rd retransmission rate indicate an area of bad
coverage or high interference. Low HS-SCCH usage rate (= high HSDPA DTX percentage ratio)
points to capacity, server or transmission problems.
In LTE networks, observe physical resource block allocation (PRB) and signal to noise ratio (SNR).
PRB affects throughput directly. Values less than maximum may indicate other users in the cell, a
bottleneck in the transmission network or not enough data to be sent (application does not need all the
available bandwidth).
Requested throughput much higher than the actual measured throughput may indicate that there are
other users sharing the radio resources of the cell or some other bottleneck in the network that
prevents the mobile from getting the maximum achievable throughput.
High PUSCH TX power values indicate a lack of uplink coverage.
When operating in the dynamic range of link adaptation, average BLER (PDSCH BLER) should be
higher than 0, typically 10-20%, in order to achieve the gain of HARQ retransmission scheme
Residual BLER after all HARQ retransmissions should be 0%. Higher values indicate that the radio
link is about to drop. Observe the MAC downlink/uplink residual BLER (%) values.
Other things that could help troubleshooting:

Disable any firewall and/or antivirus software that could reduce the throughput. Some HSPA USB
interfaces may also install their own software which may affect to window size settings in registry.

Try another FTP server for comparison.

Command prompt FTP throughput. This comparison is recommended because command prompt
FTP does not use any multithreading or other non-standard methods. For better results, keep
Nemo Outdoor at the background measuring the mobile network while making the transfers. Also
try different servers.

For Nemo Outdoor 5.60 and older versions: Run a script with simultaneous FTP transfers to see if
the throughput increases. Does not work manually, script is always needed.

For Nemo Outdoor 5.70 and later versions: Use the multithread feature of the FTP protocol to test
simultaneous transfers. Works also manually.

Make a comparison test between Nemo Outdoor and the connection manager used with the
device. When configuring a device with Nemo Outdoor, only the trace port should be defined. The
modem port and dial-up connection must be left blank. As ports are left blank it is not possible to
perform a manual PDP context activation or data transfer via Nemo Outdoor. However, a script file
with data connection commands can be used. Script files should include only data transfer
commands, not Attach/detach or PDP context activation or deactivation commands. Start a data
transfer and observe the application data throughput value. Make the same test again but this time
make a connection using Nemo Outdoor.

All Windows Versions


How to check the TCP window size from packet logs:
Using Wireshark:
1. Check the .pcap file and look at the (non FTP-DATA) TCP traffic in the middle of the transfer.
Window size value tells the current TCP window size used.

3 82

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Using Nemo Outdoor:


1.

Open a packet grid window in Nemo Outdoor.

2. Look at the TCP traffic in the middle of an FTP transfer with PayloadLen=0:

3.

Double click the frame to get detailed frame info. Look at the Tcp tree. Window shows the current
value.

Using debug logs (for developers, help desk, etc.):


1.

Look for the GetWindowSizeFromRegistry() function.

TCP Window size set to n = Value found from registry.


TCP Window size set to default: n = Value not found from registry. Set to default.
TCP Auto-Tuning detected. Window size not set. = Windows is using auto-tuning TCP window.
A measurement file does not save window size info. Packet log and/or debug log is always needed.
Windows 7/8 does not use static window sizes from the registry. They rely on dynamic window size
which is handled by TCP auto tuning feature. However, if the same registry value that XP uses is set,
Outdoor reads it and adjusts the manual window size based on this value. In most cases, the registry
has been edited by a third party software or a USB mobile interface driver/software. This registry entry
can be removed.
If TCP auto-tuning is disabled, Windows will limit the window size to 64 KB even if the value has been
configured to be higher from Nemo Outdoor.

How to check TCP auto-tuning state:


1. Open command prompt by typing CMD to Search programs and files field.

APPEND ICES

3 83

2. Type netsh interface tcp show global

3. Receive Window Auto-Tuning Level shows the current state.

Please note that administrator rights are required to change auto-tuning settings.
4. Open command prompt by typing CMD to Search programs and files field. Right-click and
select Run as administrator.

5. To disable auto-tuning type netsh interface tcp set global autotuning=disabled. This limits the
TCP window size to 64KB.
6. To increase the maximum TCP window size that auto-tuning uses, type netsh interface tcp set
global autotuning=highlyrestricted.
7. Below are all the values of auto-tuning level with explanations:

3 84

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

disabled: Uses a fixed value for the TCP receive window. Limits to 64 KB (65535).

highlyrestricted: Recommended. Allows the receive window to grow beyond its default value,
very conservatively.

restricted: Recommended. Somewhat restricted growth of the TCP receive window beyond its
default value.

normal: Default value. Allows the receive window to grow to accommodate most conditions.

experimental: Allows the receive window to grow to accommodate extreme scenarios (not
recommended, it can degrade performance in common scenarios, only intended for research
purposes). It enables receive window values of over 16 MB.

APPEND ICES

3 85

APPENDIX 4
END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
IMPORTANT - READ CAREFULLY: This End-User License Agreement ("EULA") is a legal
agreement between you (either an individual or a single entity) and Anite Finland Ltd for the Anite
Finland Ltd software product(s), in whatever form, identified above ("Software Product" or "Software").
The Software Product includes computer software, the associated media, any printed materials, and
any "online" or electronic documentation. By installing, copying or otherwise using the Software
Product, you agree to be bound by the terms of this EULA. If you do not agree to the terms of this
EULA, Anite Finland Ltd is unwilling to license the Software Product to you. In such event, you may
not use or copy the Software Product, and you should promptly return the unused product(s) in their
original packaging to the place of purchase within thirty days of the date of original purchase.
SOFTWARE PRODUCT LICENSE
The Software Product is protected by copyright laws and international copyright treaties, as well as
other intellectual property laws and treaties. The Software Product is licensed, not sold.
1. GRANT OF LICENSE. This EULA grants you the following rights:
Software. You agree that the Software product is licensed to you to be used with the mobile phone(s)
and software protection key designated by Anite Finland Ltd for such use ("Designated Hardware").
You also agree that you shall not have more than one copy of the Software Product in use at a time
for any Designated Hardware in which the Software Product is to be used or to be distributed except
as expressly provided for in this EULA. You may use one copy of the Software Product in binary code
form only on one computer at a time in order to conduct system measurements using the Designated
Hardware at various locations to the extent necessary for the permitted operation of the application
software but may not duplicate the Software Product.
Storage/Network/Single Use. You may also store or install a copy of the Software Product in binary
code form only over an internal network, and distribute the Software Product to your other computers
over an internal network. However, you must acquire and dedicate a license for the Software Product
for each Designated Hardware on which the Software Product is used or to which it is distributed. A
license for the Software Product may not be shared or used concurrently on different computers.
2. DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS.
Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation and Disassembly. Removal, emulation, or
reverse engineering of all or any part of this product or its protection constitutes an unauthorized
modification to the product and is specifically prohibited. Nothing in this license statement permits you
to derive the source or assembly code of files provided to you in executable or object formats.
Limitations on Modifications, Adaptations and Other Changes. You may not modify, adapt or
otherwise make any changes to the Software Product except and only to the extent you are expressly
permitted to do so under the applicable mandatory law notwithstanding this limitation or by Anite
Finland Ltd's prior written consent.
Separation of Components. The Software Product is licensed as a single product. Its component
parts may not be separated for use on more than one Designated Hardware and computer as
designated above.

3 86

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

Not for Resale. This Software Product is Not for Resale" or "NFR" and your license only permits
personal use and you may not sell or otherwise transfer the Software Product for value except as
specified below.
Rental. You may not rent, lease or lend the Software Product to any person or entity.
Software Transfer. You may not otherwise give or permanently transfer any or all of your rights under
this EULA without the express prior written consent of Anite Finland Ltd which such consent shall not
be unreasonably withheld.
Duration and Termination. This EULA is effective from the day you open the sealed media package
or download and continues until termination. You may terminate this EULA at any time. Without
prejudice to any other rights, Anite Finland Ltd may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with the
terms and conditions of this EULA. In either event, you must destroy all copies of the Software Product
and all associated media, printed materials, updates and component parts and verify to Anite Finland
Ltd in writing that such has been done.
3. SUPPORT SERVICES. Anite Finland Ltd may provide you with support services related to the
Software Product ("Support Services"). Any supplemental software code provided to you as part of the
Support Services shall be considered part of the Software Product and subject to the terms and
conditions of this EULA. With respect to technical information you provide to Anite Finland Ltd as part
of the Support Services, Anite Finland Ltd may use such information for its business purpose,
including for product updates and development.
4. COPYRIGHT AND TRADEMARKS. All title and copyrights in and to the Software Product (including
but not limited to any images, photographs, animations, video, audio, music, text and "applets",
incorporated into the Software Product), the accompanying printed materials, and any copies of the
Software Product, are owned by Anite Finland Ltd or its suppliers. The Software Product is protected
by copyright laws and international treaty provisions. You may not copy the printed materials
accompanying the Software Product. You may not remove, modify or alter any Anite Finland Ltd
copyright or trademark from any part of the Software Product, including but not limited to any such
notices contained in the physical and/or electronic media or documentation, in the Anite Finland Ltd
Setup Wizard dialogue or 'about' boxes, in any of the runtime resources and/or in any web-presence
or web-enabled notices, code or other embodiments originally contained in or dynamically or
otherwise created by the Software Product.
Portions based on WinWAP technology. Copyright Slob-Trot Software Oy Ab 2004.
http://www.winwap.com
Perceptual Objective Listening Quality Analysis (POLQA) according to ITU-T Recommendation P. 863
included in this product is protected by copyright and by European, US and other International patents
and patent applications and isprovided under license from
OPTICOM Dipl.-Ing. M. Keyhl GmbH, Erlangen, Germany, 2011 www.opticom.de
POLQA is a registered trademark of OPTICOM GmbH. Used by permission.
2011 by the POLQA Coalition of OPTICOM GmbH, Germany - SwissQual AG, Switzerland - KPN,
The Netherlands - TNO, The Netherlands.
www.polqa.info
This software uses Libresample library distributed under LGPL license. For detailed license
information, see libresample-license.txt, gpl-license.txt and lgpl-license.txt located in the Nemo
Outdoor installation directory.

APPEND ICES

3 87

This software uses libVLC library distributed under LGPL license. For detailed license information, see
lgpl-license.txt located in the Nemo Outdoor installation directory.
Iperf copyright
Copyright (c) 1999-2006, The Board of Trustees of the University of Illinois
All Rights Reserved.
Iperf performance test
Mark Gates
Ajay Tirumala
Jim Ferguson
Jon Dugan
Feng Qin
Kevin Gibbs
John Estabrook
National Laboratory for Applied Network Research
National Center for Supercomputing Applications
University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign
http://www.ncsa.uiuc.edu
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software (Iperf)
and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction,
including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense,
and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so,
subject to the following conditions:
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimers.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimers in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
Neither the names of the University of Illinois, NCSA, nor the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this Software without specific prior written permission.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
CONTIBUTORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN
THE SOFTWARE.
5. DUAL-MEDIA SOFTWARE. You may receive the Software Product in more than one medium.
Regardless of the type or size of medium you receive, you may use only that one medium that is
appropriate for the systems you use to operate the Software Product. You may not use or install the
other medium on any system. You may not loan, rent, lease or otherwise transfer the other medium to
another user, except as part of the permanent transfer (as provided above) of the Software Product.

3 88

Ne mo O u td oor Us er M an ua l

6. CONFIDENTIALITY AND NON-DISCLOSURE. You agree to keep in confidence and not to disclose
in any manner or form to any third party nor publish any such data or information related to the
Software Product. You agree to protect all information and data provided to you by Anite Finland Ltd
related to the Software Product with the same degree of care that you use to protect your own like
data and information, but with not less than that due care exercised by a reasonably prudent person
under the same or similar circumstances.
7. U.S. GOVERNMENTAL RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The Software Product and documentation are
provided with Restricted Rights. Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to
restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer
Software clause at DFARS 252.277-7013 or subparagraphs (c)(1) and (2) of the Commercial
Computer Software - Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52-227-19, as applicable.
8. LIMITED WARRANTY. Anite Finland Ltd warrants that (a) the Software Product will perform
substantially in accordance with the accompanying written materials for a period of three (3) months
from the date of receipt, and (b) any third party hardware accompanying the Software Products will be
free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of one (1)
year from the date of receipt. To the extent that implied warranties are disclaimable, they are
disclaimed in paragraph 10. Some states/jurisdictions do not allow disclaimers of or limitations on
duration of an implied warranty, so the above limitation may not apply to you. Any implied warranties
on the Software Product and, as applicable, third party hardware that is not disclaimable are limited to
three (3) months and one (1) year respectively.
9. CUSTOMER REMEDIES. Anite Finland Ltd and its suppliers' entire liability and your exclusive
remedy shall be, at Anite Finland Ltd option, either (a) return of the price paid, or (b) repair or
replacement of the software or hardware that does not meet the Limited Warranty contained in this
EULA and which is returned to Anite Finland Ltd. The Limited Warranty contained herein is void if
failure of the software or third party hardware has resulted from accident, abuse, misapplication or
events beyond the control of Anite Finland Ltd including, but not limited to Acts of God, acts of nature
or acts of war. Any replacement Software Products or hardware will be warranted for the remainder of
the original warranty period or thirty (30) days, whichever is longer. Anite Finland Ltd is not
responsible for ensuring adequate backup and storage for your data or records.
10. NO OTHER WARRANTIES. To the maximum extent permitted by applicable law, Anite Finland Ltd
disclaims all other warranties, either express or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties
of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, and non-infringement of third-party rights, with
regard to the Software Product, the accompanying written materials, and any accompanying
hardware. This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may have others which vary from
state/jurisdiction to state/jurisdiction.

APPEND ICES

3 89

11. NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. To the maximum extent permitted by


applicable law, in no event shall Anite Finland Ltd or its suppliers be liable for any damages
whatsoever (including without limitation, special, incidental, consequential, punitive or indirect
damages for personal injury, loss of business profits, business interruption, loss of business
information, or any other pecuniary loss) arising out of the use of or inability to use this Software
Product, even if Anite Finland Ltd has been advised of the possibility of such damages. In any case,
Anite Finland Ltd and its suppliers' entire liability under any provision of this EULA shall be limited to
the amount actually paid by you for the Software Product and/or third party hardware accompanying
the Software Product. The Limitations of Liability contained in this Section apply to claims of every
kind, whether based on contract law, tort law or otherwise, even if these limitations have the effect of
exculpating a party from responsibility for its negligence, fault or other conduct. Because some
states/jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of liability for consequential or incidental
damages, the above limitation may not apply to you.

You might also like